WO2001032624A1 - 4-phenyl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin - Google Patents

4-phenyl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2001032624A1
WO2001032624A1 PCT/US2000/030328 US0030328W WO0132624A1 WO 2001032624 A1 WO2001032624 A1 WO 2001032624A1 US 0030328 W US0030328 W US 0030328W WO 0132624 A1 WO0132624 A1 WO 0132624A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
phenyl
tetrahydroisoquinoline
methyl
alkyl
fluoro
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2000/030328
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
James P. Beck
Mark A. Smith
Original Assignee
Du Pont Pharmaceuticals Company
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Du Pont Pharmaceuticals Company filed Critical Du Pont Pharmaceuticals Company
Priority to CA2389300A priority Critical patent/CA2389300C/en
Priority to MXPA02004329A priority patent/MXPA02004329A/en
Priority to NZ519146A priority patent/NZ519146A/en
Priority to EP00976884A priority patent/EP1246805A1/en
Priority to BR0015307-9A priority patent/BR0015307A/en
Priority to AU14596/01A priority patent/AU784280B2/en
Priority to JP2001534776A priority patent/JP4907817B2/en
Publication of WO2001032624A1 publication Critical patent/WO2001032624A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D217/00Heterocyclic compounds containing isoquinoline or hydrogenated isoquinoline ring systems
    • C07D217/12Heterocyclic compounds containing isoquinoline or hydrogenated isoquinoline ring systems with radicals, substituted by hetero atoms, attached to carbon atoms of the nitrogen-containing ring
    • C07D217/14Heterocyclic compounds containing isoquinoline or hydrogenated isoquinoline ring systems with radicals, substituted by hetero atoms, attached to carbon atoms of the nitrogen-containing ring other than aralkyl radicals
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/47Quinolines; Isoquinolines
    • A61K31/472Non-condensed isoquinolines, e.g. papaverine
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/02Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for peripheral neuropathies
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • A61P25/16Anti-Parkinson drugs
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/22Anxiolytics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/24Antidepressants
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/04Anorexiants; Antiobesity agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P39/00General protective or antinoxious agents
    • A61P39/02Antidotes
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D217/00Heterocyclic compounds containing isoquinoline or hydrogenated isoquinoline ring systems
    • C07D217/02Heterocyclic compounds containing isoquinoline or hydrogenated isoquinoline ring systems with only hydrogen atoms or radicals containing only carbon and hydrogen atoms, directly attached to carbon atoms of the nitrogen-containing ring; Alkylene-bis-isoquinolines
    • C07D217/04Heterocyclic compounds containing isoquinoline or hydrogenated isoquinoline ring systems with only hydrogen atoms or radicals containing only carbon and hydrogen atoms, directly attached to carbon atoms of the nitrogen-containing ring; Alkylene-bis-isoquinolines with hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D217/00Heterocyclic compounds containing isoquinoline or hydrogenated isoquinoline ring systems
    • C07D217/12Heterocyclic compounds containing isoquinoline or hydrogenated isoquinoline ring systems with radicals, substituted by hetero atoms, attached to carbon atoms of the nitrogen-containing ring
    • C07D217/14Heterocyclic compounds containing isoquinoline or hydrogenated isoquinoline ring systems with radicals, substituted by hetero atoms, attached to carbon atoms of the nitrogen-containing ring other than aralkyl radicals
    • C07D217/16Heterocyclic compounds containing isoquinoline or hydrogenated isoquinoline ring systems with radicals, substituted by hetero atoms, attached to carbon atoms of the nitrogen-containing ring other than aralkyl radicals substituted by oxygen atoms
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D217/00Heterocyclic compounds containing isoquinoline or hydrogenated isoquinoline ring systems
    • C07D217/22Heterocyclic compounds containing isoquinoline or hydrogenated isoquinoline ring systems with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to carbon atoms of the nitrogen-containing ring
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D217/00Heterocyclic compounds containing isoquinoline or hydrogenated isoquinoline ring systems
    • C07D217/22Heterocyclic compounds containing isoquinoline or hydrogenated isoquinoline ring systems with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to carbon atoms of the nitrogen-containing ring
    • C07D217/24Oxygen atoms

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to compounds, compositions, methods for the treatment of various neurological and psychological disorders, and the use of the compounds in combination therapy.
  • the present invention relates to such compounds, compositions and methods wherein the compounds are novel 4-phenyl substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines derivatives.
  • duloxetine and fluoxetine which are known serotonin reuptake inhibitors have been found to be useful in the treatment of depression, obesity and obsessive-compulsive disease (Wong, et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,532,244).
  • Moldt, et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,444,070 discloses the use of dopamine reuptake inhibitors in the treatment of depression, Parkinsonism, drug addiction and/or abuse, ***e and/or amphetamine addiction and/or abuse. Fre ⁇ dman, et al., U.S. Patent No.
  • 6,136,803 also discloses synaptic norepinephrine or serotonin uptake inhibitors which are useful in treating depression in a patient.
  • Norden, U.S. Patent No. 5,789,449 discloses the use of serotonin re-uptake inhibitors in treating psychiatric symptoms consisting of anger, rejection sensitivity, and lack of mental or physical energy.
  • Foster, et al., U.S. Patent No. 4,902,710 discloses the use of serotonin and norepinephrine uptake inhibitors in suppressing the desire of humans to smoke or consume alcohol.
  • U.S. Patent No. 4.843,071 discloses the use of a norepinephrine re-uptake inhibitor and a norepinephrine precursor in the treatment of obesity, drag abuse, or narcolepsy in a patient.
  • Wong, et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,532,244 discloses the use of serotonin reuptake inhibitors in combination with a serotonin 1 A receptor antagonist, to increase the availability of serotonin, norepinephrine and dopamine in the brain.
  • the treatment of a va ⁇ ety of neurological and psychiatric disorders is characterized by a number of side effects believed to be due to the compounds' inability to selectvely block certain neurochemicals, and not others ADHD, for example, is a disease affecting 3-6% of school age children, and is also recognized in percentage of adults Aside from hampering performance at school, and at work, ADHD is a significant risk factor for the subsequent development of anxiety disorders, depression, conduct disorder and drug abuse Since current treatment regimes require psychostimulants, and since a substantial number of patients (30%) are resistant to stimulants or cannot tolerate their side effects, there is a need for a new drug or class of drugs which treats ADHD and does not have resistance or side effect problems In addition, methylphenidate, the current drug of choice for the treatment of ADHD, induces a number of side effects, these include anorexia, insomnia and jittery feelings, tics, as well as increased blood pressure and heart rate secondary to the activation of the sympathetic nervous system However, Methylphenidate also has a high selectivity
  • Nomofensine® which is a 4 phenyl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinoline derivative is known to inhibit the neuronal uptake of dopamine and other catecholamines and has shown clinical efficacy for ADHD
  • long term administration of Nomofensine® results in fatal immune hemolytic anemia
  • novel compounds which treat ADHD but do not have the serious side effects associated with Nomifensine® or the currently prescribed psychostimulants
  • the present invention discloses novel aryl and heteroaryl substituted tetrahydroisoquinoline derivatives compounds which block reuptake of norephineDhnne dopamine or serotonin, and are usefu* as alternatives to methylphenidate, and known psychostimulants, in the treatment of ADHD and other neurological and psychiatric disorders.
  • the claimed compounds which block reuptake of norephinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin with particular selectivity ratios, e.g., being more selective for the norepinephrine transporter (NET) protein than dopamine transporter (DAT) protein or serotonin transporter (SERT) protein (lower Ki for NET than for DAT and SERT). It is postulated that the compounds would therefore be effective as an ADHD treatment with reduced addictive liability profiles. In particular, some of the compounds of this invention are surprisingly and particularly selective for NET over the SERT protein, thus also affording compounds without the known side effect profiles of the selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor (SSRI) class of compounds.
  • SSRI selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor
  • R' is C r C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C Training alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C,-C ⁇ cycloalkyl or C 4 -C 7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected at each occurrence thereof from C.-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR 9 and -NR 9 R"';
  • R 2 is H, C,-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C,-C 6 cycloalkyl, C 4 -C 7 cycloalkylalkyl or C,-C ft haloalkyl;
  • R 1 is H, halogen, -OR 11 , -S(O) R0 -S(O) NR"R0 -CN, -C(O)R0 -C(O)NR"R0 C,-C ⁇ alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C,-C cycloalkyl, C 4 -C 7 cycloalkylalkyl, -O(phenyl) or -O(benzyl), wherein each of -O(phenyl) and -O(benzyl) is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C 4 alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl, or C,-C 4 alkoxy, or wherein R' is a C,-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkyny
  • R 1 is -O(phenyl), -O(benzyl), -OC(0)R ⁇ or -S(O) n R0 each of -O(phenyl) and -O(benzyl) is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C 4 alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl, or C,-C alkoxy;
  • R 4 is H. halogen, -OR", -S(O) R0 -S(O)NR"R0 -CN, -C(O)R0 -C(O)NR"R0 - NR"R0 C,-C 6 alkyl, C,-C f ⁇ alkenyl, C,-C f alkynyl, C,-C e cycloalkyl, C 4 -C 7 cycloalkylalkyl, -O(phenyl) or -O(benzyl), wherein each of -O(phenyl) and -O(benzyl) is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C ⁇ C ⁇ alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl, or C,-C 4 alkoxy and wherein R 4 is a C C alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C,-C ⁇ alkyn
  • R 4 is -O(phenyl), -O(benzyl), -OC(O)R0 -NR"R 12 or - S(O) n R0 each of -O(phenyl) and -O(benzyl) is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl. or C,-C 4 alkoxy;
  • R ⁇ R'' and R' in compounds of each of the formulae IA, IB, IC, ID. IE and IF are each independently H. halogen, -OR0 -S(O) R0 -CN, -C(O)R0 -NR"R0 -C(O)NR"R0 -NR"C(O)R0 -NR"C(O ⁇ R0 - NR"C(O)NR I2 R0 C,-C f alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C,-C fi alkynyl, C,-C 6 cycloalkyl or C 4 -C 7 cycloalkylalkyl, wherein each of R ⁇ R" and R 7 is a C,-C 6 alkyl, C,-C ⁇ alkenyl, C,-C f ⁇ alkynyl, C,-C 6 cycloalkyl or C 4 -C, cycloalkylalkyl group, then said group
  • -OR 9 and -NR R"', or R' and R" or R 6 and R 7 may be -0-C(R 12 ) -0-; provided that for compounds of formula IE at least one of R " or R is fluoro, chloro, or methyl: or R' and R 6 are each independently -0-C(R 12 ),-0- in compounds of the formulae IE, but only where R 7 is fluoro, chloro or methyl; or R 7 and R 6 can independently also be -0-C(R l2 ),-0- in compounds of the formulae IE, but only where
  • R ⁇ is fluoro, chloro or methyl
  • R 8 is H, halogen, or OR", provided that for compounds of formula IF, R * is halogen;
  • R 9 and R 1 " are each independently H, C,-C 4 alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl, C,-C alkoxyalkyl, C.-C ⁇ cycloalkyl,
  • R 9 and R 1 " are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form piperidine, pyrrolidine, piperazine, N-methylpiperazine, mo ⁇ holine, or thiomo ⁇ holine;
  • R" is H, C,-C 4 alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl, C,-C 4 alkoxyalkyl, C C 6 cycloalkyl, C 4 -C 7 cycloalkylalkyl, -
  • R' 2 is H, amino, C,-C 4 alkyl, (C,-C alkyl)amino, C,-C 4 haloalkyl, C,-C alkoxyalkyl, C,-C 6 cycloalkyl, C 4 -
  • R ⁇ is C,-C alkyl, C,-C haloalkyl or phenyl; n is 0, 1, or 2, and; aryl is phenyl which is optionally substituted 1 -3 times with halogen, cyano, C,-C 4 alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl and C,-C 4 alkoxy, or an oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, a solvate thereof, or prodrug thereof.
  • Alkyl means an aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may be straight or branched having about 1 to about 6 carbon atoms in the chain. Branched means that one or more lower alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl or propyl are attached to a linear alkyl chain. Exemplary alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, ⁇ -propyl, z-propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, «-pentyl, and 3-pentyl.
  • alkenyl means an aliphatic hydrocarbon group containing a carbon-carbon double bond and which may be straight or branched having about 2 to about 6 carbon atoms in the chain. Preferred alkenyl groups have 2 to about 4 carbon atoms in the chain. Branched means that one or more lower alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl or propyl are attached to a linear alkenyl chain. Exemplary alkenyl groups include ethenyl, propenyl, n-butenyl, and -butenyl.
  • Alkynyl means an aliphatic hydrocarbon group containing a carbon-carbon triple bond and which may be straight or branched having about 2 to about 6 carbon atoms in the chain. Preferred alkynyl groups have 2 to about 4 carbon atoms in the chain. Branched means that one or more lower alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl or propyl are attached to a linear alkynyl chain. Exemplary alkynyl groups include ethynyl, propynyl, n-butynyl, 2-butynyl, 3-methylbutynyl, and n-pentynyl.
  • Aryl means an aromatic monocyclic or multicyclic ring system of 6 to about 14 carbon atoms, preferably of 6 to about 10 carbon atoms. Representative aryl groups include phenyl and naphthyl.
  • Heteroaryl means an aromatic monocyclic or multicyclic ring system of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms, preferably about 5 to about 10 ring atoms, in which one or more of the atoms in the ring system is/are element(s) other than carbon, for example, nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur.
  • Preferred heteroaryls contain about 5 to 6 ring atoms.
  • aza, oxa or thia before heteroaryl means that at least a nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atom, respectively, is present as a ring atom.
  • a nitrogen atom of a heteroaryl is optionally oxidized to the corresponding N-oxide.
  • heteroaryls include pyrazinyl; furanyl: thienyl; pyridyl; pyrimidinyl; isoxazolyl; isothiazolyl; oxazolyl; thiazolyl; pyrazolyl; furazanyl; pyrrolyl; pyrazolyl; triazolyl; 1 ,2,4-thiadiazolyl; pyrazinyl; pyridazinyl; quinoxalinyl; phthalazinyl; l(2H)-phthalazinonyl; imidazo[l ,2-a]pyridine; imidazo[2, l -b]thiazolyl; benzo furazanyl; indolyl: azaindolyl; benzimidazolyl; benzothienyl; quinolinyl: imidazolyl; thienopyridyl; quinazolinyl; thienopyrimidyl;
  • Alkoxy means an alkyl-O- group wherein the alkyl group is as herein described.
  • Exemplary alkoxy groups include methoxy, ethoxy, /7-propoxy, -propoxy. «-butoxy and heptoxy.
  • Compounds of the invention are meant to embrace compounds of general formulae (IA-F) as hereinbefore described, which expression includes the prodrugs, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, and the solvates, e.g. hydrates, where the context so permits.
  • reference to intermediates, whether or not they themselves are claimed is meant to embrace their salts, and solvates, where the context so permits.
  • particular instances when the context so permits are sometimes indicated in the text, but these instances are purely illustrative and it is not intended to exclude other instances when the context so permits.
  • Cycloalkyl means a non-aromatic mono- or multicyclic ring system of about 3 to about 7 carbon atoms, preferably of about 5 to about 7 carbon atoms.
  • Exemplary monocyclic cycloalkyl include cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, and the like.
  • Cycloalkylalkyl means an cycloalkyl-alkyl- group in which the cycloalkyl and alkyl are as defined herein.
  • Exemplary cycloalkylalkyl groups include cyclopropylmethyl and cy clopenty lmethy 1.
  • Halo or "halogen” means fluoro, chloro, bromo, or iodo.
  • Haloalkyl means both branched and straight-chain alkyl substituted with 1 or more halogen, wherein the alkyl group is as herein described.
  • Haloalkoxy means a C alkoxy group substituted by at least one halogen atom, wherein the alkoxy group is as herein described.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable salts” means the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic acid addition salts, and base addition salts, of compounds of the present invention. These salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compounds.
  • acid addition salts can be prepared by separately reacting the purified compound in its free base form with a suitable organic or inorganic acid and isolating the salt thus formed.
  • Exemplary acid addition salts include the hydrobromide, hydrochloride, sulfate, bisulfate, phosphate, nitrate, acetate, oxalate, valerate, oleate, palmitate. stearate, laurate, borate. benzoate, lactate, phosphate, tosylate.
  • Base addition salts can also be prepared by separately reacting the purified compound in its acid form with a suitable organic or inorganic base and isolating the salt thus formed
  • Base addition salts include pharmaceutically acceptable metal and amine salts
  • Suitable metal salts include the sodium, potassium, calcium, barium, zinc, magnesium, and aluminum salts
  • the sodium and potassium salts are preferred
  • Suitable inorganic base addition salts are prepared from metal bases which include sodium hydride, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, aluminium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, magnesium hydroxide, zinc hydroxide
  • Suitable amine base addition salts are prepared from amines which have sufficient basicity to form a stable salt, and preferably include those amines which are frequently used in medicinal chemistry because of their low toxicity and acceptability for medical use ammonia, ethylenediamine, N-methyl-glucamine, lysine, arginine, ornithme, choline, N,N'-d
  • dehydroabietylamine N- ethylpipe ⁇ dine, benzylamme, tetramethylammonium, tetraethylammonium, methylamine, dimethylamine, trimethylamine, ethylamine, basic amino acids, e g , lysine and arginine, and dicyclohexylamme, and the like
  • prodrugs as used herein means those prodrugs of the compounds useful according to the present invention which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals with undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response, and the like, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, and effective for their intended use, as well as the zwitte ⁇ onic forms, where possible, of the compounds of the invention
  • prodrug' means compounds that are rapidly transformed in vivo to yield the parent compound of the above formula, for example by hvdrolysis in blood
  • Functional groups which may be rapidly transformed, by metabolic cleavage, in vivo form a class of groups reactive with the carboxyl group of the compounds of this invention They include, but are not limited to such groups as alkanoyl (such as acetyl, propionyl, butyryl.
  • the compounds bearing such groups act as pro-drugs
  • the compounds bearing the metabolically cleavable groups have the advantage that they may exhibit improved bioavailability as a result of enhanced solubility and/or rate of abso ⁇ tion conferred upon the parent compound by virtue of the presence of the metabolically cleavable group
  • prodrugs include, but are not limited to, acetate, formate and benzoate derivatives of alcohol and amine functional groups in the compounds of the invention.
  • the term "Therapeutically effective amounts” is meant to describe an amount of compound of the present invention effective in increasing the levels of serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine at the synapse and thus producing the desired therapeutic effect. Such amounts generally vary according to a number of factors well within the purview of ordinarily skilled artisans given the description provided herein to determine and account for. These include, without limitation: the particular subject, as well as its age, weight, height, general physical condition and medical history; the particular compound used, as well as the carrier in which it is formulated and the route of administration selected for it; and, the nature and severity of the condition being treated.
  • composition means a composition comprising a compound of formulae (IA-F) and at least one component selected from the group comprising pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, diluents, adjuvants, excipients, or vehicles, such as preserving agents, fillers, disintegrating agents, wetting agents, emulsifying agents, suspending agents, sweetening agents, flavoring agents, perfuming agents, antibacterial agents, antifungal agents, lubricating agents and dispensing agents, depending on the nature of the mode of administration and dosage forms.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carriers such as preserving agents, fillers, disintegrating agents, wetting agents, emulsifying agents, suspending agents, sweetening agents, flavoring agents, perfuming agents, antibacterial agents, antifungal agents, lubricating agents and dispensing agents, depending on the nature of the mode of administration and dosage forms.
  • suspending agents examples include ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar and tragacanth, or mixtures of these substances.
  • Prevention of the action of microorganisms can be ensured by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol. phenol, sorbic acid, and the like. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents, for example sugars, sodium chloride and the like. Prolonged abso ⁇ tion of the injectable pharmaceutical form can be brought about by the use of agents delaying abso ⁇ tion, for example, aluminum monosterate and gelatin.
  • suitable carriers, diluents, solvents or vehicles include water, ethanol, polyols, suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils (such as olive oil) and injectable organic esters such as ethyl oleate.
  • excipients include lactose, milk sugar, sodium citrate, calcium carbonate, dicalcium phosphate phosphate.
  • disintegrating agents include starch, alginic acids and certain complex silicates.
  • lubricants include magnesium stearate, sodium lauryl sulphate, talc, as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable” means it is, within the scope of sound medical judgement, suitable for use in contact with the cells of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable dosage forms” means dosage forms of the compound of the invention, and includes, for example, tablets, dragees, powders, elixirs, syrups, liquid preparations, including suspensions, sprays, inhalants tablets, lozenges, emulsions, solutions, granules, capsules and suppositories, as well as liquid preparations for injections, including liposome preparations. Techniques and formulations generally may be found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, PA, latest edition.
  • Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IA-IF wherein: the carbon atom designated * is in the R or S configuration.
  • Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IA. IB, IC, ID, IE and IF, wherein:
  • R' is C,-C 6 alkyl, C,-C 6 alkenyl, C,-C 6 alkynyl, C,- ⁇ cycloalkyl or C 4 -C 7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl. -CN, -OR 9 and -NR R'".
  • Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IA, IB, IC, ID, IE and IF, wherein:
  • R 2 is H, C,-C 6 alkyl, C,-C 6 alkenyl, C,-C 6 alkynyl, C,-C 6 cycloalkyl, C 4 -C 7 cycloalkylalkyl or C,- C f ⁇ haloalkyl.
  • Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IA, wherein: R 1 as C,-C 6 alkyl. C,-C alkenyl, C,-C 6 alkynyl, C,-C 6 cycloalkyl or C -C 7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR 9 and -NR 9 R"'.
  • Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IB, wherein: R' as -O(phenyl), -O(benzyl), -OC(O)R" or -S(O) R0 each of -O( ⁇ henyl) and -O(benzyl) optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C alkyl, C,-C haloalkyl or C,-C alkoxy.
  • R 1 is H, halogen, -OR", -S(O) R 12 , -S(O)NR"R0 -CN, -C(O)R0 -C(O)NR"R0 -O(phenyl), - O(benzyl), -OC(0)R” or -S(O) R0 C,-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C fi alkenyl, C,-C fi alkynyl, C,-C 6 cycloalkyl and C 4 -C 7 cycloalkylalkyl, wherein each of C,-C ( ⁇ alkyl, C,-C alkenyl.
  • C,-C n alkynyl, C,-C 6 cycloalkyl and C -C cycloalkylalkyl is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from 0,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR 9 and -NR 9 R0 and wherein R 1 is a - O(phenyl) or -O(benzyl) group, then said group is optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C 4 alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl or C,-C 4 alkoxy.
  • Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formula IC, wherein: R 4 is C,-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C,-C ⁇ cycloalkyl, or C 4 -C 7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR" and -NR 9 R'".
  • Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formula ID, wherein:
  • R 4 is -O(phenyl), -O(benzyl), -OC(O)R0 -NR"R 12 or -S(O) R0 and said -O(phenyl) or - O(benzyl) is optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl and C,-C 4 alkoxy.
  • R 4 is H, halogen, -OR", -S(O) R 12 , -S(O)NR"R0 -CN, -O(phenyl), -O(benzyl), -OC(O)R0 -
  • R ⁇ R" and R 1 are each independently H. halogen, -OR", -S(O) R0 -CN, -C(O)R0 -NR"R0 - C(O)NR"R0 -NR"C(O)R0 -NR"C(O) R0 -NR"C(O)NR I2 R0 C,-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C ⁇ alkenyl, C,-C f alkynyl, C ⁇ C,.
  • each R ⁇ R" and R 7 is independently a C,-C f alkyl, C 2 - C 6 alkenyl, C,-C f alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 cycloalkyl or C 4 -C 7 cycloalkylalkyl group, then said group is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR u and -NR 9 R IU , or R ⁇ and R" or R 6 and R 7 may be -0-C(R' 2 ) 2 -0-.
  • R s is fluoro, chloro. or methyl; then R' and R" are each independently H, halogen, -OR", - S(O) R0 -CN, -C(O)R0 -NR"R 12 , -C(0)NR"R 12 , -NR"C(0)R 12 , -NR n C(O) 2 R0 -NR"C(O)NR I2 R0 C,-C alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C,-C 6 cycloalkyl or C 4 -C 7 cycloalkylalkyl, wherein each of R and R" are a C,-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C -C 6 alkynyl, C,-C 6 cycloalkyl orC 4 -C 7 cycloalkylalkyl group,
  • Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formula IE, wherein:
  • R 7 is fluoro, chloro or methyl, then R' and R 6 together can also be -0-C(R 12 ) 2 -0-.
  • Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formula IE, wherein:
  • R' is fluoro, chloro or methyl, then R 7 and R 6 together can also be -0-C(R 12 ) 2 -0-.
  • Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae LA-IE, wherein:
  • R 8 is H, halogen, or OR.
  • Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formula IF, wherein R 8 is halogen.
  • Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IA-F, wherein:
  • R 9 and R 1 " are each independently H, C,-C 4 alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl, C,-C 4 alkoxyalkyl, C,-C 6 cycloalkyl, C 4 -C 7 cycloalkylalkyl, -C(O)R0 phenyl or benzyl, where said phenyl or benzyl is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C 4 alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl, or C,-C 4 alkoxy; or
  • R 9 and R l() are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form piperidine, pyrrolidine, piperazine, N-methylpiperazine, mo ⁇ holine, or thiomo ⁇ holine rings.
  • Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IA-F, wherein:
  • R" is H, C,-C 4 alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl, C,-C 4 alkoxyalkyl, C,-C 6 cycloalkyl, C 4 -C 7 cycloalkylalkyl, -C(O)R0 phenyl or benzyl, where said phenyl or benzyl is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl, or C,-C 4 alkoxy.
  • Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IA-F, wherein:
  • R' 2 is H, C,-C 4 alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl, C,-C 4 alkoxyalkyl, C,-C 6 cycloalkyl, C 4 -C 7 cycloalkylalkyl, phenyl or benzyl, where said phenyl or benzyl is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C 4 alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl and C,-C alkoxy; or
  • R" and R 12 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form piperidine, pyrrolidine, piperazine. N-methylpiperazine, mo ⁇ holine or thiomo ⁇ holine rings.
  • Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IA-F, wherein:
  • R ⁇ is C,-C 4 alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl or phenyl; and n is 0, 1 , or 2.
  • Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of fomullae LA-IF, wherein:
  • R' is C,-C, alkyl
  • R 2 is H, C,-C 4 alkyl or C,-C complicat haloalkyl.
  • Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IA, IC, ID, IE and IF, wherein:
  • R' is C,-C 4 alkyl, C,-C 6 cycloalkyl or C 4 -C 7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of these groups being optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl. halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR 9 and -NR 9 R'°.
  • Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formula IB, wherein:
  • R 1 is -O(phenyl) or -O(benzyl), is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C 4 alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl, or C,-C 4 alkoxy.
  • Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IC, ID, IE and IF: wherein R 1 is -O(phenyl) or -O(benzyl), and is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C 4 alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl, and C,-C alkoxy.
  • Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IC-IF, wherein: R' is H.
  • Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IA, IB, IC, IE and IF, wherein:
  • R 4 is C,-C 4 alkyl, C,-C 6 cycloalkyl or C 4 -C 7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of these groups being optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from 0,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR 9 and -NR*R'".
  • Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IA, IB, IE and IF, wherein:
  • R 4 is H.
  • Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IA, IB, IE and IF, wherein:
  • R 4 is -NR"R0 -O(phenyl) or -O(benzyl), each of these aryl groups being is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C 4 alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl, or C,-C 4 alkoxy.
  • Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IE and IF, wherein:
  • R ' and R 4 are both halogen.
  • Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IA, IB, IC, ID and IF, wherein:
  • R ⁇ R" and R 7 are each H, halogen, -OR", -NR"R0 C,-C ⁇ alkyl or C,-C 6 alkyl optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR 9 and -NR R'".
  • Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IA, IB, IC, ID, IE and IF, wherein: R s is fluoro, chloro or methyl; one of R 6 or R 7 is H; and the other of R 6 or R 7 which is not H is halogen, -OR", -NR H R 12 , C,-C 6 alkyl or C I -C 6 alkyl each of which is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR 9 and - NR 9 R0
  • Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IA, IB, IC, ID and IE, wherein:
  • R 8 is H or halogen.
  • Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formula IF, wherein: R 8 is halogen.
  • Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IA, IB, IC, ID, IE and IF, wherein: the substituents R'-R 8 are as set forth in the following table B:
  • More preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds wherein: R 1 is C r C, alkyl; R 2 is H or C,-C, alkyl;
  • R' is H, C,-C 4 alkyl, -O(phenyl) or optionally substituted -O(phenyl), more preferably halogen
  • R 4 is H, C,-C 4 alkyl, -O(phenyl) or optionally substituted -O(phenyl), more preferably halogen
  • R s is F, Cl or Me, more preferably -OR", wherein R" is C,-C, alkyl; R 6 is H or more preferably Cl, F, C,-C, alkyl, halo-substituted C,-C, alkyl, or -OR", R" is C,-C, alkyl or -NR"R 12 ;
  • R 7 is H or more preferably Cl, F, C,-C, alkyl or -OR", wherein R" is C,-C, alkyl.
  • a further more preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds wherein:
  • R' is CH,; R 2 is H or CH,;
  • R 1 is H, CH,, or -O(phenyl) or -0-CH 2 -(phenyl), each of said -O(phenyl) or -0-CH 2 -(phenyl) is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C 4 alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl, or C,-C 4 alkoxy;
  • R 4 is H, F, CHfind CH 2 CH,, CH 2 CH 2 CHiff CH 2 CH(CH,)CHinstitut -O(phenyl) or -0-CH 2 -phenyl, where each of said -O(phenyl) or -0-CH,-(phenyl) is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C 4 alkyl, C,-C 4 haloalkyl, or C,-C 4 alkoxy; R0s H, CH,, OCHfix F or Cl ;
  • R" is H, CHvisor -OCH fashion F, Cl or CF,; R 7 is H, F, Cl. CH, or OCH,; and R 8 is halogen.
  • the specifically preferred compounds are:
  • Another preferred aspect of the invention is a mixture of compounds of formulae (IA-F) wherein the compound of formulae (IA-F) is radiolabeled, i.e., wherein one or more of the atoms described are replaced by a radioactive isotope of that atom (e.g , C replaced by l C and H replaced by 3 H).
  • radiolabeled i.e., wherein one or more of the atoms described are replaced by a radioactive isotope of that atom (e.g , C replaced by l C and H replaced by 3 H).
  • Such compounds have a variety of potential uses, e.g., as standards and reagents in determining the ability of a potential pharmaceutical to bind to neurotransmitter proteins.
  • Another aspect of the invention is a therapeutically effective amount of the compound of formulae (IA-F) and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • Another aspect of the invention is a method of treating a disorder which is created by or is dependent upon decreased availability of serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine, which comprises administering to a patient in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • Another aspect of the invention is a method of treating a disorder which is created by or is dependent upon decreased availability of serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine, which comprises administering to a patient in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and a therapeutically effective amount of a serotonin 1 A receptor antagonist, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • a compound of formulae (IA-F) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
  • a serotonin 1 A receptor antagonist or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • Another aspect of the invention is a method of treating a disorder which is created by or is dependent upon decreased availability of serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine, which comprises administering to a patient in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and a therapeutically effective amount of a compound selected from the group consisting of WAY 100135 and spiperone, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • WAY 100135 N-(t-butyl)-3-[a-(2-methoxyphenyl)piperazin-l-yl]-2-phenylpropanamide
  • Spiperone (8-[4-(4-fluorophenyl)-4-oxobutyl]- l -phenyl- 1 , 3, 8-triazaspiro[4,5]decan-4- one) is a well- known compound, and is diclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3, 155,669 and 3,155,670.
  • the activity of Spiperone as a 5-HT 1 ⁇ antagonist is shown in Middlemiss et al., Neurosci. and Biobehav. Rev.
  • Another aspect of the invention is a method of treating a disorder which is created by or is dependent upon decreased availability of serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine, which comprises administering to a patient in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F) , or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and a therapeutically effective amount of a selective neurokinin- 1 receptor antagonist, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • a compound of formulae (IA-F) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
  • a selective neurokinin- 1 receptor antagonist or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • Neurokinin-1 receptor antagonists of use in combination a compound of formulae (IA-F) in the present invention are fully described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,373,003, 5,387,595, 5,459,270, 5,494,926, 5,162,339, 5,232,929, 5,242,930, 5,496,833, 5,637,699; PCT International Patent Publication Nos. WO 90/05525, 90/05729, 94/02461 , 94/02595, 94/03429,94/03445, 94/04494, 94/04496, 94/05625, 94/07843, 94/08997. 94/10165. 94/10167.
  • Another aspect of the invention is a method of treating a disorder which is created by or is dependent upon decreased availability of serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine, which comprises administering to a patient in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F) , or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and a therapeutically effective amount of a norepinephrine precursor, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • a method of treating a disorder which is created by or is dependent upon decreased availability of serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine which comprises administering to a patient in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F) , or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and a therapeutically effective amount of a norepinephrine precursor, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • Another aspect of the invention is a method of treating a disorder which is created by or is dependent upon decreased availability of serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine, which comprises administering to a patient in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F) , or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and a therapeutically effective amount of a compound selected from L-tyrosine and L-phenylalanine, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • a compound of formulae (IA-F) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
  • a compound selected from L-tyrosine and L-phenylalanine or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • Another aspect of the invention is a method of treating a disorder referred to in the above- mentioned embodiments, wherein the disorder is selected from the group: attention deficit disorder, hyperactivity disorder, anxiety, depression, post-traumatic stress disorder, supranuclear palsy, eating disorders, obsessive compulsive disorder, analgesia, nicotine addiction, panic attacks, Parkinsonism and phobia, obesity, late luteal phase syndrome or narcolepsy, ***e addiction, amphetamine addiction, and psychiatric symptoms anger such as, rejection sensitivity, and lack of mental or physical energy.
  • Another aspect of the invention is a method of inhibiting synaptic norepineph ⁇ ne uptake in a patient in need thereof comp ⁇ sing administering a therapeutically effective inhibitory amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F)
  • Another aspect of the invention is a method of inhibiting synaptic serotonin uptake in a patient in need thereof comprising administering a therapeutically effective inhibitory amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F)
  • Another aspect of the invention is a method of inhibiting synaptic dopamine uptake in a patient in need thereof comprising administering a therapeutically effective inhibitory amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F)
  • Another aspect of the invention is a therapeutic method described herein wherein the (+)- stereoisomer of the compound of formulae (IA-F) is employed
  • Another aspect of the invention is a therapeutic method described herein wherein the (-)- stereoisomer of the compound of formulae (IA-F) is employed
  • kits comprising a compound of formulae (IA-F) and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a serotonin 1 A receptor antagonist compound, a selective neurok ⁇ n ⁇ n-1 receptor antagonist compound, and a norepinephrine precursor compound
  • Another aspect of the invention is a method of treating depression in a patient in need thereof comprising inhibiting synaptic serotonin and norepinephrine uptake by administering a therapeutically effective inhibitory amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F) which functions as both a serotonin and norepinephrine uptake inhibitor
  • Another aspect of the invention is a method of treating depression in a patient in need thereof comprising inhibiting synaptic serotonin and dopamine uptake by administering a therapeutically effective inhibitory amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F) which functions as both a serotonin and dopamine uptake inhibitor
  • Another aspect of the invention is a method of treating depression in a patient in need thereof comprising inhibiting synaptic dopamine and norepinephrine uptake by administering a therapeutically effective inhibitory amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F) which functions as both a dopamine and norepinephrine uptake inhibitor
  • Another aspect of the invention is a method for inhibiting serotonin uptake in mammals which comprises administering to a mammal requiring increased neurotransmission of serotonin a pharmaceutically effective amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F)
  • Another aspect of the invention is a method for inhibiting dopamine uptake in patients which comprises administering to a mammal requiring increased neurotransmission of dopamine a pharmaceutically effective amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F)
  • Another aspect of the invention is a method for inhibiting norepinephrine uptake in patients which comprises administering to a mammal requiring increased neurotransmission of norepinephrine a pharmaceutically effective amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F) .
  • Another aspect of the invention is a method of suppressing the desire of humans to smoke comprising administering to a human in need of such suppression an effective dose, to relieve the desire to smoke, of a compound of formulae (IA-F) .
  • Another aspect of the invention is a method of suppressing the desire of humans to consume alcohol comprising administering to a human in need of such suppression an effective dose, to relieve the desire to consume alcohol, of a compound of formulae (IA-F) .
  • certain feactures of the invention which are, for clarity, described in the context of separate embodiments, may also be provided in combination in a single embodiment.
  • various feactures of the invention which are, for brevity, described in the context of a single embodiment, may also be provided seperately or in any suitable subcombination.
  • a compound of formulae (IA-F) including a group containing one or more nitrogen ring atoms may be converted to the corresponding compound wherein one or more nitrogen ring atom of the group is oxidized to an N-oxide, preferably by reacting with a peracid, for example peracetic acid in acetic acid or m-chloroperoxybenzoic acid in an inert solvent such as dichloromethane, at a temperature from about room temperature to reflux, preferably at elevated temperature.
  • a peracid for example peracetic acid in acetic acid or m-chloroperoxybenzoic acid in an inert solvent such as dichloromethane
  • NHR 1 cleanly generates the alkylation products of formula (V)
  • the alkylation reactions may be run under a wide variety of conditions familiar to one skilled in the art of organic synthesis Typical solvents include acetonit ⁇ le, toluene, diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, dimethylsulfoxide, dimethylformamide, methylene chloride, and lower alkyl alcohols including ethanol
  • the reactions may be successfully run at temperatures ranging from 0°C up to the boiling point of the solvent employed Reaction progress is conventionally determined by standard chromatographic and spectroscopic methods
  • the alkylation reaction is optionally run with the addition of a non-nucleophihc organic base such as, but not limited to, py ⁇ dine, triethylamine and dnsopropyl ethylamine
  • the R0substituted N-benzyl amines of formula (R 3 ,R 4 -Ph)-CH(R 2 )-NHR 1 may be purchased from commercial sources, or alternatively, obtained from a simple reductive animation protocol
  • carbonyl containing compounds of Formulae (IV, Scheme 1 ) may be treated with H2N-R 1 in lower alkyl alcoholic solvents (preferably methanol) at temperatures at or below room temperature
  • the resulting imme may be reduced most commonly with alkaline earth borohydrides (preferably sodium borohydride) to provide the desired amine intermediate
  • Reductions of compounds of formula (V) to the benzyl alcohols of formula (VI) proceeds with many reducing agents including, as example, sodium borohydride, lithium borohydride, borane, diisobutylaluminum hvd ⁇ de. and lithium aluminum hydride
  • the reductions are carried out for a period of time between 1 hour to 3 days at room temperature or elevated temperature up to the reflux point of the solvent employed.
  • borane it may be employed as a complex for example, but not limited to, borane-methyl sulfide complex, borane-piperidine complex, borane-tetrahydrofuran complex.
  • Compounds of formula (VI) may be cyclized to the target compounds of formulae LA-IF of this invention by brief treatment with a strong acid.
  • Suitable acids include, but are not limited to, concentrated sulfuric acid, polyphosphoric acid, methanesulfonic acid and trifluoroacetic acid.
  • the reactions are run neat or in the optional presence of a co-solvent such as, for example, methylene chloride and 1 ,2-dichloroethane.
  • the cyclizations may be conducted at temperatures ranging from 0°C up to the reflux point of the solvent employed.
  • a co-solvent such as, for example, methylene chloride and 1 ,2-dichloroethane.
  • the cyclizations may be conducted at temperatures ranging from 0°C up to the reflux point of the solvent employed.
  • One skilled in the art of heterocyclic chemistry will readily understand these conditions or may consult the teachings of Mondeshka, et al.
  • Cyclizations may also be effected by treatment of compounds of formula (VI) with strong Lewis Acids, such as for example, aluminum trichloride typically in halogenated solvents such as methylene chloride.
  • strong Lewis Acids such as for example, aluminum trichloride typically in halogenated solvents such as methylene chloride.
  • haloacetophenones of formula may be treated with simple amines of formula H2N-R 1 under alkylation conditions as described above (vide supra) to provide compounds of formulae (VII).
  • a second alkylation may then be performed utilizing reagents of formula (VIII) where X represents a leaving group, such as for example, but not limited to, halogen, mesylate, or tosylate to afford the common intermediate of formula (V).
  • Reagents of formula (VIII) are in turn available from the appropriately substituted carbonyl compound of formula (IV) via reduction (vide supra) and activation.
  • Activation to leaving group X is effected by treatment of the alcohol with methanesulfonyl chloride or /j-toluenesulfonyl chloride in the presence of a non-nucleophilic base such as, but not limited to, l,5-diazabicyclo[4.3.0]non-5-ene (DBN), pyridine or triethylamine.
  • a non-nucleophilic base such as, but not limited to, l,5-diazabicyclo[4.3.0]non-5-ene (DBN), pyridine or triethylamine.
  • DBN l,5-diazabicyclo[4.3.0]non-5-ene
  • pyridine pyridine
  • triethylamine triethylamine
  • Benzylic activation to Leaving Group X may also be effected by treatment with halogenating agents such as, but not limited to, SOoCb, CI2, PCI5, Br2, CuBr2, NBS, and CBr
  • halogenating agents such as, but not limited to, SOoCb, CI2, PCI5, Br2, CuBr2, NBS, and CBr
  • Compounds of formula (XI) may be treated with strong bases, such as, but not limited to lower alkyl ⁇ C ⁇ _ ) lithium bases (preferably t-BuLi or n-BuLi) to afford the anticipated halogen-metal exchange followed by intramolecular Barbier cyclization to generate compounds of formulae (IA-IE,
  • strong bases such as, but not limited to lower alkyl ⁇ C ⁇ _ ) lithium bases (preferably t-BuLi or n-BuLi) to afford the anticipated halogen-metal exchange followed by intramolecular Barbier cyclization to generate compounds of formulae (IA-IE,
  • R8 0H).
  • Inert solvents such as dialkyl ethers (preferably diethyl ether), cyclic ethers (preferably tetrahydrofuran or 1 ,4-dioxane). etc. are necessary, and reaction temperatures are kept low (-78°C to - 25°C) to avoid by-products.
  • halogen-metal exchange may also be effected in the presence of zerovalent nickel, in which case N,N-dialkylformamides (preferably dimethylformamide) serve as ideal solvents.
  • Kihara, et al. Tetrahedron, 1992, 48.
  • Bromoisoquinolines (XII) may be treated with an aryl boronic acid or aryl boronic acid ester where Y is equivalent to B(OHb or B(OR a )(OR' 3 ) (where R a and R* 0 are lower alkyl, ie. Ci -C ⁇ . or taken together, R a and R D are lower alkylene. ie. C2-C12) in the presence of a metal catalyst with or without a base in an inert solvent to give isoquinoline compounds of formula (XIII).
  • Metal catalysts include, but are not limited to, salts or phosphine complexes of Cu, Pd, or Ni (eg.
  • Bases may include, but are not limited to, alkaline earth metal carbonates, alkaline earth metal bicarbonates, alkaline earth metal hydroxides, alkali metal carbonates, alkali metal bicarbonates, alkali metal hydroxides, alkali metal hydrides (preferably sodium hydride), alkali metal alkoxides (preferably sodium methoxide or sodium ethoxide), alkaline earth metal hydrides, alkali metal dialkylamides (preferably lithium diisopropylamide), alkali metal bis(trialkylsilyl)amides (preferably sodium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide), trialkyl amines (preferably diisopropylethylamine or triethylamine) or aromatic amines (preferably pyridine).
  • alkaline earth metal carbonates alkaline earth metal bicarbonates, alkaline earth metal hydroxides, alkali metal hydrides (preferably sodium hydride), alkali metal alkoxides (preferably sodium methoxide or sodium e
  • Inert solvents may include, but are not limited to acetonitrile, dialkyl ethers (preferably diethyl ether), cyclic ethers (preferably tetrahydrofuran or 1 ,4-dioxane), N,N- dialkylacetamides (preferably dimethylacetamide), N,N-dialkylformamides (preferably dimethylformamide), dialkylsulfoxides (preferably dimethylsulfoxide), aromatic hydrocarbons (preferably benzene or toluene) or haloaalkanes (preferably methylene chloride).
  • Prefered reaction temperatures range from room temperature up to the boiling point of the solvent employed. The reactions may be run in conventional glassware or in one of many commercially available parallel synthesizer units.
  • Non-commercially available boronic acids or boronic acid esters may be obtained from the corresponding optionally substituted aryl halide as described by Gao, et al. (Tetrahedron, 1994, 50, 979-9
  • the second step of the sequence involves reduction to the tetrahydroisoquinolines of formulae IA-F.
  • a mild reducing agent is employed, such as for example, sodium cyanoborohydride in the presence of acid catalyst to facilitate the reaction. Additional guidance for effectively conducting this chemistry may be located from the works of Miller, et al. (Synthetic Communications. 1994, 24, 1 187-1 193) and Terashi a. et al. (Heterocycles, 1987, 26. 1603-1610).
  • compounds useful according to the present invention may contain asymmetric centres. These asymmetric centres may independently be in either the R or S configuration and such compounds are able to rotate a plane of polarized light in a polarimeter. If said plane of polarized light is caused by the compound to rotate in a counterclockwise direction, the compound is said to be the (-) stereoisomer of the compound. If said plane of polarized light is caused by the compound to rotate in a clockwise direction, the compound is said to be the (+) stereoisomer of the compound.
  • compositions containing the compounds described herein including, in particular, pharmaceutical compositions comprising therapeutically effective amounts of the compounds and pharmaceutically acceptable carriers
  • kits having a plurality of active ingredients (with or without carrier) which, together, may be effectively utilized for carrying out the novel combination therapies of the invention
  • kits or single packages combining two or more active ingredients useful in treating a disorder described herein
  • a kit may provide (alone or in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier), the compound of formulae (IA-F) and the additional active ingredient (alone or in combination with diluent or carrier) selected from a serotonin 1 A receptor antagonist, a selective neurok ⁇ n ⁇ n-1 receptor antagonist, and a norepinephrine precursor
  • compounds of the present invention may generally be administered parenterally. intravenously, subcutaneously intramuscularly, colonically, nasally, intraperitoneally, rectally or orally
  • compositions containing at least one product according to the invention which are suitable for use in human or veterinary medicine
  • These compositions may be prepared according to the customary methods, using one or more pharmaceutically acceptable adjuvants or excipients
  • the adjuvants comprise, inter alia, diluents, sterile aqueous media and the various non-toxic organic solvents
  • the compositions may be presented in the form of tablets, pills, granules, powders, aqueous solutions or suspensions, injectable solutions, elixirs or syrups, and can contain one or more agents chosen from the group comprising sweeteners, flavorings, colorings, or stabilizers in order to obtain pharmaceutically acceptable preparations
  • excipients such as lactose, sodium citrate, calcium carbonate, dicalcium phosphate and disintegrating agents such as starch, alginic acids and certain complex silicates combined with lubricants such as magnesium stearate, sodium lauryl sulfate and talc may be used for preparing tablets
  • lactose and high molecular weight polyethylene glycols When aqueous suspensions are used they can contain emulsifying agents or agents which facilitate suspension Diluents such as sucrose, ethanol, polyethylene glycol, propylene glycol, glycerol and chloroform or mixtures thereof may also be used
  • compositions containing the compounds of the invention may be prepared by conventional means
  • compounds of the invention may be dissolved or suspended in a suitable carrier for use in a nebulizer or a suspension or solution aerosol, or may be absorbed or adsorbed onto a suitable solid carrier for use in a dry powder inhaler
  • Solid compositions for rectal administration include suppositories formulated in accordance with known methods and containing at least one compound of formulae (IA-F)
  • the percentage of active ingredient in the compositions of the invention may be varied, it being necessary that it should constitute a proportion such that a suitable dosage shall be obtained Obviously, several unit dosage forms may be administered at about the same time
  • the dose employed will be determined by the physician, and depends upon the desired therapeutic effect, the route of administration and the duration of the treatment, and the condition of the patient In the adult, the doses are generally from about 0 01 to about 100, preferably about 0 01 to about 10, mg/kg body weight per day by inhalation, from about 0 01 to about 100, preferably 0 1 to 70, more especially 0 5 to 10, mg/kg body weight per day by oral administration, and from about 0 01 to about 50, preferably 0 01 to 10, mg/kg body weight per day by intravenous administration In each particular case, the doses will be determined in accordance with the factors distinctive to the subject to be treated
  • the products according to the invention may be administered as frequently as necessary in order to obtain the desired therapeutic effect Some patients may respond rapidly to a higher or lower dose and may find much weaker maintenance doses adequate For other patients, it may be necessary to have long-term treatments at the rate of 1 to 4 doses per day, in accordance with the physiological requirements of each particular patient Generally, the active product may be administered orally 1 to 4 times per day It goes without saying that, for other patients, it will be necessary to prescribe not more than one or two doses per day
  • the present invention provides compounds which inhibit synaptic norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin uptake and are therefore believed to be useful in treating a disorder which is created by or is dependent upon decreased availability of serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine
  • the compounds of the formulae (IA-F) inhibit synaptic norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin uptake, in any individual compound these inhibitory effects may be manifested at the same or vastly different concentrations or doses
  • some compounds of the formulae (IA-F) are useful in treating such a disorder at doses at which synaptic norepinephrine uptake may be substantially inhibited but at which synaptic serotonin uptake or dopamine uptake is not substantially inhibited, or visa versa
  • some compounds of the formulae (IA-F) are useful in treating such a disorder at doses at which synaptic dopamine uptake may be substantially inhibited but at which synaptic norepin
  • concentrations or doses at which a test compound inhibits synaptic norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin uptake is readily determined by the use of standard assay and techniques well known and appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art
  • the degree of inhibition at a particular dose in rats can be determined by the method of Dudley, et al , J Pharmacol Exp Ther 217, 834-840 (1981 ), which is incorporated by reference
  • the therapeutically effective inhibitory dose is one that is effective in substantially inhibiting synaptic norepinephrine uptake, synaptic dopamine uptake, or synaptic serotonin uptake or inhibiting the synaptic uptake of two or more of norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin uptake
  • the therapeutically effective inhibitory dose can be readily determined by those skilled in the art by using conventional range finding techniques and analagous results obtained in the test systems described above.
  • Compounds of this invention provide a particularly beneficial therapeutic index relative to other compounds available for the treatment of similar disorders. Without intending to be limited by theory, it is believed that this is due, at least in part, to some of the compounds' having higher binding affinities, e.g. their ability to be selective, for the norepinephrine transporter protein ("NET") over the transporters for other neurochemicals, e.g., the dopamine transporter protein (“DAT”) and the serotonin transporter protein (“SERT”).
  • NET norepinephrine transporter protein
  • DAT dopamine transporter protein
  • SERT serotonin transporter protein
  • Binding affinities are demonstrated by a number of means well known to ordinarily skilled artisans, including, without limitation, those described in the Examples section hereinbelow. Briefly, for example, protein-containing extracts from cells, e.g., HEK293E cells, expressing the transporter proteins are incubated with radiolabelled ligands for the proteins. The binding of the radioligands to the proteins is reversible in the presence of other protein ligands, e.g., the compounds of this invention; said reversability, as described below, provides a means of measuring the compounds' binding affinities for the proteins (Ki). A higher Ki value for a compound is indicative that the compound has less binding affinity for a protein than is so for a compound with a lower Ki; conversely, lower Ki values are indicative of greater binding affinities.
  • the difference in compound selectivity for proteins is indicated by a lower Ki for the protein for which the compound is more selective, and a higher Ki for the protein for which the compound is less selective.
  • the higher the ratio in Ki values of a compound for protein A over protein B the greater is the compounds' selectivity for the latter over the former (the former having a higher Ki and the latter a lower Ki for that compound).
  • Compounds provided herein induce fewer side effects during therapeutic usage because of their selectivity for the norepinephrine transporter protein, as indicated by the ratios of their Ki's for binding to NET over those for binding to other transporter proteins, e.g., DAT and SERT.
  • some of the compounds of this invention have a Ki ratio for DAT/NET of at least about 2: 1 ; generally also have a SERT/NET ratio of at least about 20: 1.
  • tetrabenazine (TBZ) (see, e.g., G. Stille, Arzn. Forsch 14:534-537, 1964. the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference). Randomized and coded doses of test compounds are administered to mice, as is then a dose of tetrabenazine. Animals are then evaluated for antagonism of tetrabenazine-induced exploratory loss and ptosis at specified time intervals after drug administration.
  • TTZ tetrabenazine
  • Exploratory activity is, for example, evaluated by placing the animal in the center of a circle and then evaluating the amount of time it takes for the animal to intersect the circle's perimeter - generally, the longer it takes for the animal to make this intersection, the greater is its loss of exploratory activity. Furthermore, an animal is considered to have ptosis if its eyelids are at least 50% closed. Greater than 95% of the control (vehicle-treated) mice are expected to exhibit exploratory loss and ptosis; compound-related activity is then calculated as the percentage of mice failing to respond to the tetrabenazine challenge dose, with therapeutically more effective compounds expected to better at reducing loss of exploratory behavior and ptosis.
  • this invention provides methods of treating subjects afflicted with various neurological and psychiatric disorders by administering to said subjects a dose of a pharmaceutical composition provided herein.
  • Said disorders include, without limitation, attention deficit-hyperactivity disorder, anxiety, depression, post-traumatic stress disorder, supranuclear palsy, feeding disorders, obsessive compulsive disorder, analgesia, smoking cessation, panic attacks, Parkinson's and phobia.
  • the compounds provided herein are particularly useful in the treatment of these and other disorders due, at least in part, to their ability to selectively bind to the transporter proteins for certain neurochemicals with a greater affinity than to the transporter proteins for other neurochemicals.
  • Step A A solution of m-tolualdehyde (500 mg, 4.16 mmol), -(methylaminomethyl)benzyl alcohol (630 mg, 4.16 mmol) and acetic acid (0.5 ml) was stirred in methanol (16 ml) at 0°C under nitrogen as sodium cyanoborohydride (784 mg, 12.5 mmol) was added in small portions. The reaction mixture was stirred for 5 minutes at 0°C and two days at ambient temperature. The reaction mixture was brought to pH 12 with 2N sodium hydroxide, diluted with water, and extracted with diethyl ether (3X).
  • Step B The product from Step A (1.24 g, 4.90 mmol) was stirred in methylene chloride (208 ml) and treated dropwise with concentrated sulfuric acid (98%, 10 ml) over 3 minutes. After stirring for 20 minutes, the reaction was diluted with ice chips and made basic with 25% aqueous ammonium hydroxide. The reaction mixture was extracted with methylene chloride (3X) and the organic extracts combined, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo.
  • Step B The product from Step A (1.0 g, 4.0 mmol) was stirred in methylene chloride (100 ml) and treated dropwise with concentrated sulfuric acid (98%, 7.0 ml) over 3 minutes. After stirring for 1 hour, the reaction was diluted with ice chips and and made basic with 25% aqueous ammonium hydroxide. The reactions mixture was extracted with methylene chloride (3 X 100 ml) and the organic extracts combined, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo.
  • Step C The product from Step B was subjected to chiral HPLC separation employing a Chiral
  • the reaction was stirred 20 minutes and treated with sodium borohydride (0.64 g, 33.0 mmol) portionwise.
  • the reaction was stirred 1 hour and treated with 4'-fluoro-3'-methyl-2-bromoacetophenone (7.69 g, 33.0 mmol) followed by stirring for 45 minutes at room temperature.
  • the reaction was finally treated with sodium borohydride (1.0 g, 33 mmol) portionwise and stirring continued overnight.
  • the reaction was diluted with water (100 ml) and extracted with methylene chloride (3 X 100 ml). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, followed by filtration and concentration in vacuo.
  • Step B The product from Step A (0.52 g, 2.0 mmol) was dissolved in methylene chloride (20 ml) and treated dropwise with concentrated sulfuric acid (98%, 3 ml). The reaction was stirred overnight at room temperature, then diluted with ice chips and and made basic with 25% aqueous ammonium hydroxide. The reaction mixture was extracted with methylene chloride (3 X 50 ml) and the organic extracts combined, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo.
  • Step A A solution of -(methylaminomethyl)benzyl alcohol (745 mg, 4.9 mmol) and triethylamine (0.79 ml, 5.66 mmol) in acetonitrile (45 ml) at 0°C under nitrogen was treated dropwise with 2-fluoro-3-methylbenzyl bromide ( 1.0 g, 4.9 mmol) as a solution in acetonitrile (25 ml). The reaction was stirred at 0°C for 1 hour and at room temperature for 1.5 hours, followed by dilution with water and extraction with methylene chloride (3X).
  • Step B The product from Step A (0.5 g, 1.8 mmol) was treated with sulfuric acid (3.7 ml) and purified by column chromatography as described for Example 1. Step B to afford the desired product
  • Step A Methylmagnesium bromide was added dropwise over 5 minutes to a stirred solution of
  • Step B The product from Step A (9.0 g, 52.0 mmol) in anyhdrous methylene chloride (60 ml) under nitrogen was added by cannula to a stirred suspension of pyridinium chlorochromate ( 16.7 g, 77.0 mmol) and diatomaceous earth ( 15 g) in anhydrous methylene chloride ( 150 ml) at 0°C under nitrogen. After stirring for 26 hours, the heterogeneous mixture was diluted with diethyl ether (300 ml), stirred for 1 hour, and filtered.
  • Step C The product from Step B (52 mmol) was treated with tetrabutylammonium tribromide
  • Step D Methylamine (40 wt% aqueous, 18.0 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of benzaldehyde (1.8 g, 17 mmol) in methanol (20 ml) under nitrogen. After stirring 10 minutes at room temperature, the solution was cooled to 0°C and treated with sodium borohydride (0.32 g, 8.5 mmol) portionwise. The reaction was stirred for 15 minutes, warmed to room temperature and stirred an additional 1 hour, whereupon the product from Step C (4.3 g, 17 mmol) was added.
  • Step E The product from Step D (1.77 g, 6.0 mmol) was stirred in concentrated sulfuric acid
  • Step F The product from Step E (1.7 g, 6.0 mmol) was treated with ethereal HCl (1.0 M, 12.0 ml, 12.0 mmol) in methanol (20 ml) to afford a precipitate.
  • Step G The product from Step E was subjected to chiral HPLC separation employing a Chiral
  • the reaction was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour and concentrated in vacuo to remove acetic acid.
  • Step B The product from Step A (37.0 g, 158.0 mmol) was dissolved in methylene chloride (290 ml) and added dropwise to a solution of N-benzyl-N-methylamine (20.3 ml, 158.0 mmol) and triethylamine (22.0 ml, 158.0 mmol) in methylene chloride (312 ml). The addition was carried out over 45 minutes at 0°C, warmed to room temperature and allowed to stir an additional 4 hours. The reaction was diluted with water (300 ml) and extracted with methylene chloride. The combined organic extracts were dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo.
  • Step C The product from Step B (15.0 g, 54.0 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (65 ml), chilled in an ice bath and treated with sodium borohydride (1.38 g, 36.0 mmol). The reaction was stirred at 0°C for 1 hour and at room temperature for 1 hour, followed by quenching with water and extraction with methylene chloride. The combined organic extracts were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to directly provide the pure benzylic alcohol ( 14.4 g) as a yellow oil: ⁇ NMR
  • Step D The product from Step C (14.4 g, 52.0 mmol) was stirred in concentrated sulfuric acid (27.0 ml) and methylene chloride (333 ml) for 15 minutes at room temperature. The reaction was poured on ice, made alkaline with concentrated ammonium hydroxide, and extracted with diethyl ether.
  • Step F The product from Step D was subjected to chiral HPLC separation employing a Chiral
  • Step B To the product mixture from Step A (3.5 g, 14.7 mmol) and N-methyl-N-benzylamine (1.8 g, 14.7 mmol) in methylene chloride ( 15 ml) was added diisopropyl ethyl amine (3.0 ml. 17 mmol). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 5.5 hours, then washed with water and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. After filtration and concentration in vacuo, the material was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (140 g) eluting with hexanes / ethyl acetate / triethylamine
  • Step C The product from Step B (1.1 g, 4.0 mmol) was dissolved in methanol, chilled in an ice bath and treated with sodium borohydride (0.1 g, 2.7 mmol). The reaction was stirred at 0°C for 1 hour and at room temperature for 1 hour, followed by quenching with water and extraction with methylene chloride. The combined organic extracts were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to provide the benzylic alcohol (0.8 g) as an orange oil: ] H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) ⁇ 7.40-7.30
  • Step D The product from Step C (0.4 g, 1.4 mmol) was stirred in concentrated sulfuric acid (1.5 ml) and methylene chloride ( 10 ml) for 15 minutes at room temperature. The reaction was poured on ice, made alkaline with concentrated ammonium hydroxide, and extracted with diethyl ether. The combined ether extracts were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Purification by column chromatography on silica gel (15 g) eluting with hexanes / ethyl acetate / triethylamine
  • Step A Nitromethane ( 1.6 L, 30 mmol) was added dropwise to an ice-cold solution of tetrabutylammonium fluoride (7.5 mmol) in dry THF (20 mL). A solution of 3,5-difluorobenzaldehyde (2.85 g, 20.1 mmol ) in dry THF (5 L) was added dropwise. Triethylamine (2.8 mL, 20 mmol) was then added dropwise. A solution of terf-butyldimethylsilyl chloride (4.54 g, 30.1 mmol) in dry THF (15 mL) was added dropwise, causing a white precipitate to form.
  • Step B A slurry of the product from Step A (2.35 g, 1 1.6 mmol) and platinum oxide (0.20 g) in absolute ethanol (20 mL) was hydrogenated at 40 psig for 4 h. The reaction was filtered throgh a plug of Celite, which was washed with additional absolute ethanol.
  • Step C A solution of 3-methylacetophenone (1.36 g, 10.1 mmol) and the product from Step B
  • Step D Concentrated H,S0 4 (12.0 mL) was added to a stirred, ice-cold solution of the crude product from Step C (3.00 g, 10.3 mmol) in CH 2 C1 2 (105 mL). After stirring 15 min, the mixture was poured onto ice, made strongly alkaline with excess cone. NH 4 OH, and extracted (2 x) with Et,0. The combined organic extracts were dried over Na,S0 4 , filtered, and the solvent was removed in vacuo.
  • Step E Formaldehyde (37 wt%, 0.70 mL, 9.4 mmol) was added to a solution of the product from Step D (426 mg, 1.56 mmol) in methanol ( 16 mL). After 1.5 h, Raney nickel (0.51 g) was added. and the reaction was hydrogenated at 35 psig for 21 h. The reaction was filtered through a pad of Celite, which was washed with methanol. The filtrate was evaporated in vacuo, leaving a milky liquid, which was extracted with ether. The ether extract was dried over Na 2 S0 4 , filtered, and the solvent was removed in vacuo.
  • Step F A 1 M HCl solution in ether (1.0 mL, 1.0 mmol) was added dropwise to a stirred solution of of the product from Step E (82 mg, 0.28 mmol) in methanol (3 mL). After 30 min, the solvents and excess HCl were removed in vacuo. and the residue precipitated from ether and sonicated for 30 min.
  • Step B Triethylamine (8.40 mL, 60.0 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of the product from Step A (8.35 g, 60.0 mmol) and phenacyl bromide ( 1 1.94 g, 60.0 mmol) in CH : C1 2 (200 L) at room temperature under N vide.
  • Step C Sodium borohydride (4.54 g, 120 mmol) was added portionwise to a stirred solution of the product from Step B (17.1 g, -60.0 mmol) in MeOH (150 mL), cooled to 0 °C under N 2 . After stirring for 4.5 h at room temperature, the reaction was diluted with H 2 0 (300 mL) and extracted (4 x) with CH 2 C1 2 . The organic extracts were combined, washed with sat. NaCl, dried over Na 2 S0 4 , filtered, and the solvent evaporated in vacuo.
  • Step D Cone, sulfuric acid (24 mL) was added dropwise to a stirred solution of the product from Step C (14.8 g, 57.1 mmol) in CH,C1 2 (280 mL), cooled to 0 °C, using an ice-water bath. The cooling bath was removed after addition was complete and the reaction was vigorously stirred at room temperature for 20 min. The reaction was then poured into an ice / water mixture (400 mL) and the resultant mixture basified with cone. NH OH solution to pH ⁇ 10. The aq. layer was extracted (3 x) with CH 2 C1 The organic extracts were combined, washed with a 2: 1 mixture of sat.
  • Step E r-Butyl lithium (30 mL, 1.7 M in pentane, 50.5 mmol) was added dropwise to a stirred solution of the product from Step D (5.50 g, 22.8 mmol) and TMEDA (7.6 mL, 50.2 mmol) in Et 2 0 (120 mL) cooled to -60 °C under N,. After stirring for 45 min, DMF (7.0 mL, 91.2 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at -60 °C for 1.5 h.
  • DMF 7.0 mL, 91.2 mmol
  • Step G An ethereal HCl solution (1.80 mL, 1 N, 1.80 mmol) was added to a solution of the product from Step F (0.10 g, 0.35 mmol) in MeOH (0.5 mL) and Et 2 0 (5 mL) at room temperature, resulting in the formation of a off-white solid.
  • Step A Methylamine (40 wt% aqueous, 2.6 mL. 30 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of 3- bromobenzaldehyde (5.44 g, 29.4 mmol) in MeOH (30 mL) under N,. After stirring 1 h, the colorless solution was cooled to 0 °C and then NaBH (0.60 g, 16 mmol) was added portionwise. After stirring 1 h, the cooling bath was removed. After stirring for 90 min, the reaction was cooled to 0 °C and then phenacyl bromide (5.90 g, 29.6 mmol) was added portionwise over 30 min. The reaction was allowed to warm to room temperature.
  • Step B Cone. H 2 S0 (40.0 mL) was added dropwise over 15 min to a stirred solution of the product from Step A (9.18 g, 28.7 mmol) in CH,C1 2 (300 mL). After stirring 45 min, the mixture was poured onto ice, made strongly alkaline with excess cone. NH 4 OH, extracted (3 x) with Et 2 0.
  • Step C A slurry of bromide the product from Step B (1.15 g, 3.81 mmol), zinc cyanide (271 mg, 2.31 mmol) , and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (266 mg, 0.230 mmol) in dry DMF (5 mL) was heated at 83 °C for 24 h. After allowing the reaction to cool to room temperature, the reaction was diluted with toluene and washed with 2 N NaOH. The toluene extract was dried over Na,S0 4 , filtered, and concentrated in vacuo.
  • Step D A solution of the product from Step C (201 mg, 0.809 mmol) in dry THF (4 mL) was added dropwise to an ice-cold slurry of lithium aluminum hydride (61 mg, 1.6 mmol) in dry THF (2 mL). The reaction was stirred for 90 min with cooling and then was allowed to warm to room temperature. The reaction was stirred for 5 h and then was quenched with EtOAc and then a saturated Na,S0 4 solution. The reaction was diluted with ether, dried over solid Na,S0 4 , filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (26 g) eluting with 12% methanol/chloroform containing 1 % cone.
  • Step E A slurry of the product from Step D (53 mg. 0.21 mmol) and maleic acid (25 mg, 0.22 mmol) in absolute EtOH (10 mL) was heated in a 40 °C water bath until all of the solid had dissolved. After 1 h, the reaction was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was recrystallized from ethanol/ether producing the bis maleate salt (43 mg, 42%) as a green solid: mp 176-177 °C (with decomposition); ⁇ NMR (300 MHz.
  • Step A A 1 M HCl solution in ether (3.0 mL, 3.0 mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of the product from Step C, Example 90 (82 mg, 0.32 mmol) in methanol (6 mL). The solvents and excess HCl were removed in vacuo leaving a green solid. A slurry of this green solid, potassium carbonate (199 mg, 1.44 mmol), and ethyl chloroformate (0.20 mL, 2.1 mmol) in methanol (1 mL) and acetone (6 mL) was heated at 50 °C for 20 h.
  • Step C A slurry of the product from Step B (20 mg, 0.075 mmol) and maleic acid (9 mg, 0.08 mmol) in absolute EtOH (5 mL) was heated in a 40 °C water bath until all of the solid had dissolved. After 2 h. the reaction was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was recrystallized from ethanol/ether producing the bis maleate product ( 13 mg, 35%) as a tan solid: mp 160- 163 °C (with decomposition); ⁇ NMR (300 MHz, CDOD) ⁇ 7.41-7.31 (m, 5H), 7.24-7.21 (m. 2H), 6.99 (d.
  • Step A A solution of /V-methyl-2-methoxy amine (8.00 g, 52.9 mmol) and triethylamine (5.40 g, 53.0 mmol) in dichloromethane ( 100 mL) was cooled in an ice water bath. The 2-bromoacetophenone (10.5 g, 53.0 mmol) was added, and the reaction was allowed to warm to room temperature. The reaction mixture was diluted with water (200 mL) and MTBE (200 mL). Layers were separated, and the organic layer was washed with H 2 0 and brine.
  • Step B The product from Step A (12.6 g, 46.8 mmol) was taken up in methanol (120 mL) and cooled in an ice- water bath. Sodium borohydride (1.76 g, 46.8 mmol) was added portionwise. The reaction was stirred for 1 h at ambient temperature. The reaction mixture was concentrated to half of the original volume. Water (100 mL) was added, and the mixture was extracted (3 x) with dichloromethane.
  • Step C Methanesulfonic acid (47.7 mL, 735 mmol) was added at ambient temperature to a solution of the product from Step B (4.20 g, 13.7 mmol) in dichloromethane (250 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature under nitrogen for 24 h. After the reaction was complete, the reaction was made basic (pH - 1 1 ) with 2 N NaOH, and extracted (3 x) with methylene chloride. The combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over MgS0 and concentrated in vacuo.
  • Step D A solution of the product from Step C (5.60 g, 22.1 mmol) in 48% hydrobromic acid (60 mL) was refluxed at 100 °C for 3 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and recrystallized from ethanol to yield the desired product (4.74 g, 67): ⁇ NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-cQ ⁇ 9.92 (s, IH), 7.48-7.25 (m, 3H), 7.21 (d.
  • Step F The product from Step E (1.00 g, 2.87 mmol) was dissolved in water (20 mL) before treatment with sodium sulfate (100 mg) and hydroxyl amine sulfonate (0.32 mg 2.87 mmol). Reaction was stirred for 2 h. Reaction was cooled in an ice- water bath and treated with CH 2 C1 2 (20 mL). Sodium bicarbonate (600 mg) was added and the reaction was allowed to warm to ambient temperature. The solids were filtered off and combined with the organic layer. The mixture was concentrated and chromatographed (SiO cleanOAc/hexanes, 1/1). Two compounds eluted simultaneously. The mixture was treated with ethanol (5 mL) and filtered.
  • Step A A solution of Step C, Example 90 (127 mg, 0.51 1 mmol) in dry toluene (13 mL) was cooled to -16 °C and then 1 M DIBAL-H in toluene ( 1.7 mL, 1.7 mmol) was added dropwise. The reaction was stirred for 45 min with cooling and then EtOAc (1.1 L) was added. The reaction was allowed to warm to room temperature. The reaction was stirred for 45 min and then 1 N H 2 S0 4 ( 12 mL) was added. The reaction was heated at reflux for 30 min. After allowing the reaction to cool to room temperature, the reaction was diluted with water, made basic with 2 N NaOH, and extracted (2 x) with CH,C1,.
  • Step B To an ice-cold solution of the product from Step A (1 10 mg. 0.438 mmol) in methanol (20 mL) was added NaBH 4 (36 mg, 0.95 mmol). The reaction was slowly allowed to warm to room temperature overnight. The reaction was quenched with water and brine and then was extracted (3 x) with CH,CL. The combined organic extracts were dried over Na,S0 4 , filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue (106 mg) was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (31 g) eluting with EtOAc to give the desired alcohol (44 mg, 40%) as a yellow oil: ⁇ NMR (300 MHz. CDC1,) ⁇ 7.32-7.22 (m. 3H).
  • Step A Ethylene glycol dimethyl ether (20 mL) and 2 N Na 2 CO, (12.2 mL) were sparged with N 2 and charged to a round bottom flask containing 4-bromoisoquinoline (2 g, 9.6 mmol), phenylboronic acid (1.76 g, 14.4 mmol), and Pd(PPh,) 4 (1.1 1 g, 0.96 mmol). The entire solution was sparged with N 2 . The resulting reaction mixture was heated to reflux under N, overnight. The solution was cooled, quenched with saturated NaHCO, (230 mL), and extracted five times with ethyl ether.
  • Step B Ethyl triflate (383 mg, 2.15 mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of the product from Step A (400 mg, 1.95 mmol) in CH,C1, (24 mL) at 0"C under N literature. The solution was stirred for 15 min. at room temperature. The solvent was removed in vacuo to yield the triflate salt of the isoquinoline as a white solid (420 mg, 56% yield).
  • the triflate salt (420 mg. 1.09 mmol) was dissolved in MeOH ( 16 mL), and NaCNBH, ( 159 mg, 2.53 mmol) was added to the solution. The resulting reaction mixture was stirred for 5 min., and a few drops of bromocresol green in MeOH were added.
  • Binding Assays P ⁇ marv binding assays
  • HEK293E cell lines were developed to express each of the three human transporters cDNAs containing the complete coding regions of each transporter were amplified by PCR from human brain libraries
  • the cDNAs contained in pCRII vectors were sequenced to verify their identity and then subcloned into an Epstem-Barr virus based expression plasmid (E Shen, GM Cooke, RA Horhck, Gene 156.235-239, 1995)
  • This plasmid containing the coding sequence for one of the human transporters was transfected into HEK293E cells Successful transfection was verified by the ability of known reuptake blockers to inhibit the uptake of t ⁇ tiated NE, DA or 5HT
  • mice Male CFI mice (Charles River Breeding Laboratories) weighing 18-25 gm at the time of testing, are housed a minimum of06 days under carefully controlled environmental conditions (22 2 + 1 1 C, 50% average humidity, 12 hr lighting cycle/24 hr) Mice are fasted overnight ( 16-22 hr) prior to testing Mice are placed into clear polycarbonated "shoe" boxes (17 cm x 28 5 cm x 12 cm) Randomized and coded doses of test compounds are administered p o A 45 mg/kg dose of tetrabenazine is administered I p 30 minutes prior to score time All compounds are administered in a volume of 0 1 ml/10 gm body weight Animals are evaluated for antagonism of tetrabena
  • mice are examined for signs of exploratory activity and ptosis.
  • Exploratory activity is evaluated by placing the animal in the center of a 5 inch circle. Fifteen seconds are allowed for the animal to move and intersect the perimeter. This is considered antagonism of tetrabenazine and given a score of 0. Failure to leave the circle is regarded as exploratory loss and given a score of 4. An animal is considered to have ptosis if its eyelids are at least 50% closed and given a score of 4 if completely closed. No closure is given a score of 0. Greater than 95% of the control (vehicle-treated) mice are expected to exhibit exploratory loss and ptosis. Drug activity is calculated as the percentage of mice failing to respond to the tetrabenazine challenge dose.

Abstract

Provided herein are compounds of formulae IA-IF. These compounds are tetrahydroisoquinolines of structure (A) wherein R1-R8 for compounds of each of the formulae IA, IB, IC, ID, IE and IF are as described herein. Said compounds are particularly useful in the treatment of various neurological and psychiatric disorders, e.g., ADHD.

Description

4 -PHENYL- SUBSTITUTED TETRAHYDROISOQUINOLINES AND USE THEREOF TO BLOCK REUPTAKE OF NOREPINEPHRINE, DOPAMINE AND SEROTONIN
Field of the Invention The present invention relates to compounds, compositions, methods for the treatment of various neurological and psychological disorders, and the use of the compounds in combination therapy. In particular, the present invention relates to such compounds, compositions and methods wherein the compounds are novel 4-phenyl substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines derivatives.
Background of the Invention Serotonin, dopamine and norepinephrine are known to be important chemical messengers participating in the transmission of nerve impulses in the brain. These messengers are liberated at specific sites on pre-synaptic cells and received, to complete transmission of the impulse, at specific sites on post-synaptic cells. Their effect is then terminated by metabolism or by uptake into the pre-synaptic cells. Drugs capable of blocking the pre-synaptosomal uptake of either of these chemical messengers in the brain, are useful in alleviating disorders associated with decreased levels of these chemical messengers. For example, duloxetine and fluoxetine which are known serotonin reuptake inhibitors have been found to be useful in the treatment of depression, obesity and obsessive-compulsive disease (Wong, et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,532,244). Also, Moldt, et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,444,070, discloses the use of dopamine reuptake inhibitors in the treatment of depression, Parkinsonism, drug addiction and/or abuse, ***e and/or amphetamine addiction and/or abuse. Freεdman, et al., U.S. Patent No. 6,136,803 also discloses synaptic norepinephrine or serotonin uptake inhibitors which are useful in treating depression in a patient. Furthermore, Norden, U.S. Patent No. 5,789,449 discloses the use of serotonin re-uptake inhibitors in treating psychiatric symptoms consisting of anger, rejection sensitivity, and lack of mental or physical energy. Also, Foster, et al., U.S. Patent No. 4,902,710, discloses the use of serotonin and norepinephrine uptake inhibitors in suppressing the desire of humans to smoke or consume alcohol. Thus, there continues to remain a need to develop novel compounds which block reuptake of norephinephrine, dopamine or serotonin.
Compounds which inhibit the reuptake of serotonin or norephinephrine. have also been used in combination therapy. For example, Glatt, et al., U.S. Patent no. 6,121,261 discloses the use of selective serotonin reuptake Inhibitors or norephinephrine uptake inhibitiors, in combination with neurokinin- 1 receptor antagonist for treating attention deficit disorder in a patient.
Also, Hohenwarter, U.S. Patent No. 4.843,071 discloses the use of a norepinephrine re-uptake inhibitor and a norepinephrine precursor in the treatment of obesity, drag abuse, or narcolepsy in a patient. Furthermore, Wong, et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,532,244, discloses the use of serotonin reuptake inhibitors in combination with a serotonin 1 A receptor antagonist, to increase the availability of serotonin, norepinephrine and dopamine in the brain. The treatment of a vaπety of neurological and psychiatric disorders is characterized by a number of side effects believed to be due to the compounds' inability to selectvely block certain neurochemicals, and not others ADHD, for example, is a disease affecting 3-6% of school age children, and is also recognized in percentage of adults Aside from hampering performance at school, and at work, ADHD is a significant risk factor for the subsequent development of anxiety disorders, depression, conduct disorder and drug abuse Since current treatment regimes require psychostimulants, and since a substantial number of patients (30%) are resistant to stimulants or cannot tolerate their side effects, there is a need for a new drug or class of drugs which treats ADHD and does not have resistance or side effect problems In addition, methylphenidate, the current drug of choice for the treatment of ADHD, induces a number of side effects, these include anorexia, insomnia and jittery feelings, tics, as well as increased blood pressure and heart rate secondary to the activation of the sympathetic nervous system However, Methylphenidate also has a high selectivity for the dopamine transporter protein over the norepinephrine transporter protein (DAT/NET Ki ratio of 0 1 ), which can lead to addiction liability and requires multiple doses per day for optimal efficacy Thus, there continues to remain a need to develop novel compounds which block reuptake of norephinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin with particular selectivity ratios U S Patent No 3,947,456, discloses tetrahydroisoquinolines which are said to have utility as anti-depressants U S Patent No 3,666,763, describes the use of phenyl tetrahydroisoquinoline derivatives as antidepressants and antihypotensives Canadian Patent Application No 2,015,1 14, discloses the use of phenyl tetrahydroisoquinoline derivatives as antidepressants, moreover, described therein are apparently nonselective as to norepinephrine, serotonin and dopamine uptake UK Patent Application No 2,271 ,566 , discloses the use of phenyl tetrahydroisoquinoline derivatives as anti-HIV agents PCT International Application No WO98/40358 discloses the use of phenyl tetrahydroisoquinoline derivatives to be useful in the treatment of disorders of glucose metabolic pathways W097/36876 discloses the use of phenyl tetrahydroisoquinoline derivatives as anticancer agents W097/23458 also describes 4 phenyl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines as NMDA receptor ligands useful for conditions associated with neuronal loss Phenyl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines are also described in Mondeshka et al II Farmaco, 1994,49 pp 475-481
Nomofensine® which is a 4 phenyl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinoline derivative is known to inhibit the neuronal uptake of dopamine and other catecholamines and has shown clinical efficacy for ADHD However, long term administration of Nomofensine® results in fatal immune hemolytic anemia Thus, there continues to remain a need to develop novel compounds which treat ADHD but do not have the serious side effects associated with Nomifensine® or the currently prescribed psychostimulants
The present invention discloses novel aryl and heteroaryl substituted tetrahydroisoquinoline derivatives compounds which block reuptake of norephineDhnne dopamine or serotonin, and are usefu* as alternatives to methylphenidate, and known psychostimulants, in the treatment of ADHD and other neurological and psychiatric disorders.
The present inventors have discovered that the claimed compounds which block reuptake of norephinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin with particular selectivity ratios, e.g., being more selective for the norepinephrine transporter (NET) protein than dopamine transporter (DAT) protein or serotonin transporter (SERT) protein (lower Ki for NET than for DAT and SERT). It is postulated that the compounds would therefore be effective as an ADHD treatment with reduced addictive liability profiles. In particular, some of the compounds of this invention are surprisingly and particularly selective for NET over the SERT protein, thus also affording compounds without the known side effect profiles of the selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor (SSRI) class of compounds.
Summary of the Invention This invention is directed to a compound of formulae (IA-F) :
Figure imgf000004_0001
IA-IF wherein: the carbon atom designated * is in the R or S configuration;
R' is CrC6 alkyl, C2-C„ alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C,-Cβ cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected at each occurrence thereof from C.-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR9 and -NR9R"'; R2 is H, C,-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl, C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl or C,-Cft haloalkyl;
R1 is H, halogen, -OR11, -S(O) R0 -S(O) NR"R0 -CN, -C(O)R0 -C(O)NR"R0 C,-Cβ alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C,-C cycloalkyl, C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, -O(phenyl) or -O(benzyl), wherein each of -O(phenyl) and -O(benzyl) is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy, or wherein R' is a C,-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C1-C6 cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl group, then said group is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C1-C1 alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR9 and -NR9R' '; provided that for compounds of formula IA, R1 is C C6 alkyl, C2-Cf> alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR" and -
NR R; provided that for compounds of formula IB, R1 is -O(phenyl), -O(benzyl), -OC(0)Rπ or -S(O)nR0 each of -O(phenyl) and -O(benzyl) is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C alkoxy;
R4 is H. halogen, -OR", -S(O) R0 -S(O)NR"R0 -CN, -C(O)R0 -C(O)NR"R0 - NR"R0 C,-C6 alkyl, C,-C alkenyl, C,-Cf alkynyl, C,-Ce cycloalkyl, C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, -O(phenyl) or -O(benzyl), wherein each of -O(phenyl) and -O(benzyl) is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C^C^ alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy and wherein R4 is a C C alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C,-Cή alkynyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl group, then said group is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR9 and -NR R'"; provided that for compounds of formula IC, R4 is C,-C( alkyl, C,-C alkenyl, C,-C alkynyl, C,-C cycloalkyl, or C -C7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of which is is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN. -OR ' and -NR R"', or R and R" or R' and R^ may be -0-C(R'2)2-0-; provided that for compounds of formula ID, R4 is -O(phenyl), -O(benzyl), -OC(O)R0 -NR"R12 or - S(O)nR0 each of -O(phenyl) and -O(benzyl) is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl. or C,-C4 alkoxy;
R\ R'' and R' in compounds of each of the formulae IA, IB, IC, ID. IE and IF are each independently H. halogen, -OR0 -S(O) R0 -CN, -C(O)R0 -NR"R0 -C(O)NR"R0 -NR"C(O)R0 -NR"C(O\R0 - NR"C(O)NRI2R0 C,-Cf alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C,-Cfi alkynyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, wherein each of R\ R" and R7 is a C,-C6 alkyl, C,-CΛ alkenyl, C,-C alkynyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl or C4-C, cycloalkylalkyl group, then said group is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN. -OR9 and -NR R"', or R' and R" or R6 and R7 may be -0-C(R12) -0-; provided that for compounds of formula IE at least one of R" or R is fluoro, chloro, or methyl: or R' and R6 are each independently -0-C(R12),-0- in compounds of the formulae IE, but only where R7 is fluoro, chloro or methyl; or R7 and R6 can independently also be -0-C(Rl2),-0- in compounds of the formulae IE, but only where
R^ is fluoro, chloro or methyl; R8 is H, halogen, or OR", provided that for compounds of formula IF, R* is halogen;
R9 and R1" are each independently H, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, C,-C alkoxyalkyl, C.-C^ cycloalkyl,
C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, -C(0)Rπ, phenyl or benzyl, where phenyl or benzyl is optionally substituted from
1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano,
C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C alkoxy; or R9 and R1" are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form piperidine, pyrrolidine, piperazine, N-methylpiperazine, moφholine, or thiomoφholine;
R" is H, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, C,-C4 alkoxyalkyl, C C6 cycloalkyl, C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, -
C(O)R0 phenyl or benzyl, where R" is a C,-C4 alkyl, phenyl or benzyl group, then said group is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy;
R'2 is H, amino, C,-C4 alkyl, (C,-C alkyl)amino, C,-C4 haloalkyl, C,-C alkoxyalkyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl, C4-
C7 cycloalkylalkyl, phenyl or benzyl, where phenyl or benzyl is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C haloalkyl and C,-C4 alkoxy; or R" and R12 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form piperidine, pyrrolidine, piperazine, N-methylpiperazine. moφholine, or thiomoφholine; provided that only one of R9 and R'" or R9 and R1" are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form piperidine, pyrrolidine, piperazine, N-methylpiperazine, moφholine, or thiomoφholine;
Rπ is C,-C alkyl, C,-C haloalkyl or phenyl; n is 0, 1, or 2, and; aryl is phenyl which is optionally substituted 1 -3 times with halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl and C,-C4 alkoxy, or an oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, a solvate thereof, or prodrug thereof.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
As used above, and throughout the description of the invention, the following terms, unless otherwise indicated, shall be understood to have the following meanings:-
The term "Alkyl" means an aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may be straight or branched having about 1 to about 6 carbon atoms in the chain. Branched means that one or more lower alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl or propyl are attached to a linear alkyl chain. Exemplary alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, π-propyl, z-propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, «-pentyl, and 3-pentyl.
The term "Alkenyl" means an aliphatic hydrocarbon group containing a carbon-carbon double bond and which may be straight or branched having about 2 to about 6 carbon atoms in the chain. Preferred alkenyl groups have 2 to about 4 carbon atoms in the chain. Branched means that one or more lower alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl or propyl are attached to a linear alkenyl chain. Exemplary alkenyl groups include ethenyl, propenyl, n-butenyl, and -butenyl.
The term "Alkynyl" means an aliphatic hydrocarbon group containing a carbon-carbon triple bond and which may be straight or branched having about 2 to about 6 carbon atoms in the chain. Preferred alkynyl groups have 2 to about 4 carbon atoms in the chain. Branched means that one or more lower alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl or propyl are attached to a linear alkynyl chain. Exemplary alkynyl groups include ethynyl, propynyl, n-butynyl, 2-butynyl, 3-methylbutynyl, and n-pentynyl. The term "Aryl" means an aromatic monocyclic or multicyclic ring system of 6 to about 14 carbon atoms, preferably of 6 to about 10 carbon atoms. Representative aryl groups include phenyl and naphthyl.
The term "Heteroaryl" means an aromatic monocyclic or multicyclic ring system of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms, preferably about 5 to about 10 ring atoms, in which one or more of the atoms in the ring system is/are element(s) other than carbon, for example, nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur. Preferred heteroaryls contain about 5 to 6 ring atoms. The prefix aza, oxa or thia before heteroaryl means that at least a nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atom, respectively, is present as a ring atom. A nitrogen atom of a heteroaryl is optionally oxidized to the corresponding N-oxide. Representative heteroaryls include pyrazinyl; furanyl: thienyl; pyridyl; pyrimidinyl; isoxazolyl; isothiazolyl; oxazolyl; thiazolyl; pyrazolyl; furazanyl; pyrrolyl; pyrazolyl; triazolyl; 1 ,2,4-thiadiazolyl; pyrazinyl; pyridazinyl; quinoxalinyl; phthalazinyl; l(2H)-phthalazinonyl; imidazo[l ,2-a]pyridine; imidazo[2, l -b]thiazolyl; benzo furazanyl; indolyl: azaindolyl; benzimidazolyl; benzothienyl; quinolinyl: imidazolyl; thienopyridyl; quinazolinyl; thienopyrimidyl; pyrrolopyridyl; imidazopyridyl: isoquinolinyl; benzoazaindolyl; azabenzimidazolyl, 1,2,4-triazinyl; benzothiazolyl and the like.
The term "Alkoxy" means an alkyl-O- group wherein the alkyl group is as herein described. Exemplary alkoxy groups include methoxy, ethoxy, /7-propoxy, -propoxy. «-butoxy and heptoxy. The term "Compounds of the invention", and equivalent expressions, are meant to embrace compounds of general formulae (IA-F) as hereinbefore described, which expression includes the prodrugs, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, and the solvates, e.g. hydrates, where the context so permits. Similarly, reference to intermediates, whether or not they themselves are claimed, is meant to embrace their salts, and solvates, where the context so permits. For the sake of clarity, particular instances when the context so permits are sometimes indicated in the text, but these instances are purely illustrative and it is not intended to exclude other instances when the context so permits.
The term "Cycloalkyl" means a non-aromatic mono- or multicyclic ring system of about 3 to about 7 carbon atoms, preferably of about 5 to about 7 carbon atoms. Exemplary monocyclic cycloalkyl include cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, and the like.
The term "Cycloalkylalkyl" means an cycloalkyl-alkyl- group in which the cycloalkyl and alkyl are as defined herein. Exemplary cycloalkylalkyl groups include cyclopropylmethyl and cy clopenty lmethy 1.
The term "Halo" or "halogen" means fluoro, chloro, bromo, or iodo. The term "Haloalkyl" means both branched and straight-chain alkyl substituted with 1 or more halogen, wherein the alkyl group is as herein described.
The term "Haloalkoxy" means a C alkoxy group substituted by at least one halogen atom, wherein the alkoxy group is as herein described.
The term "Substituted" or "substitution" of an atom means that one or more hydrogen on the designated atom is replaced with a selection from the indicated group, provided that the designated atom's normal valency is not exceeded. "Unsubstituted" atoms bear all of the hydrogen atoms dictated by their valency. When a substituent is keto (i.e., =0), then 2 hydrogens on the atom are replaced. Combinations of substituents and/or variables are permissible only if such combinations result in stable compounds; by "stable compound" or "stable structure" is meant a compound that is sufficiently robust to survive isolation to a useful degree of purity from a reaction mixture, and formulation into an efficacious therapeutic agent.
The term "Pharmaceutically acceptable salts" means the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic acid addition salts, and base addition salts, of compounds of the present invention. These salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compounds. In particular, acid addition salts can be prepared by separately reacting the purified compound in its free base form with a suitable organic or inorganic acid and isolating the salt thus formed. Exemplary acid addition salts include the hydrobromide, hydrochloride, sulfate, bisulfate, phosphate, nitrate, acetate, oxalate, valerate, oleate, palmitate. stearate, laurate, borate. benzoate, lactate, phosphate, tosylate. citrate, maleate, fumarate, succinate, tartrate. naphthylate, mesylate, glucoheptonate, lactiobionate, sulphamates, malonates, salicylates, propionates, methylene-bis-b-hydroxynaphthoates, gentisates, isethionates, di-p-toluoyltartrates, methane-sulphonates, ethanesulphonates, benzenesulphonates, p-toluenesulphonates, cyclohexylsulphamates and quinateslaurylsulphonate salts, and the like. (See, for example S. M. Berge, et al., "Pharmaceutical Salts," J. Pharm. Sci., 66: p.1-19 (1977) and Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th ed.. Mack Publishing Company, Easton, PA, 1985, p. 1418, which are incoφorated herein by reference.) Base addition salts can also be prepared by separately reacting the purified compound in its acid form with a suitable organic or inorganic base and isolating the salt thus formed Base addition salts include pharmaceutically acceptable metal and amine salts Suitable metal salts include the sodium, potassium, calcium, barium, zinc, magnesium, and aluminum salts The sodium and potassium salts are preferred Suitable inorganic base addition salts are prepared from metal bases which include sodium hydride, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, aluminium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, magnesium hydroxide, zinc hydroxide Suitable amine base addition salts are prepared from amines which have sufficient basicity to form a stable salt, and preferably include those amines which are frequently used in medicinal chemistry because of their low toxicity and acceptability for medical use ammonia, ethylenediamine, N-methyl-glucamine, lysine, arginine, ornithme, choline, N,N'-dιbenzylethylenedιamιne, chloroprocame, diethanolamine, procaine, N-benzylphenethylamine, diethylamine, piperazine, tπs(hydroxymethyl)-amιnomethane, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, triethylamine, dibenzylamine, ephenamine. dehydroabietylamine, N- ethylpipeπdine, benzylamme, tetramethylammonium, tetraethylammonium, methylamine, dimethylamine, trimethylamine, ethylamine, basic amino acids, e g , lysine and arginine, and dicyclohexylamme, and the like
The term "Pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs" as used herein means those prodrugs of the compounds useful according to the present invention which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals with undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response, and the like, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, and effective for their intended use, as well as the zwitteπonic forms, where possible, of the compounds of the invention The term ' prodrug' means compounds that are rapidly transformed in vivo to yield the parent compound of the above formula, for example by hvdrolysis in blood Functional groups which may be rapidly transformed, by metabolic cleavage, in vivo form a class of groups reactive with the carboxyl group of the compounds of this invention They include, but are not limited to such groups as alkanoyl (such as acetyl, propionyl, butyryl. and the like), unsubstituted and substituted aroyl (such as benzo l and substituted benzoyl), alkoxycarbonyl (such as ethoxycarbonyl) tπalkylsilyl (such as tπmethyl- and tπethysilyl), monoesters formed with dicarboxyhc acids (such as succinyl), and the like Because of the ease with which the metabolically cleavable groups of the compounds useful according to this invention are cleaved in vivo, the compounds bearing such groups act as pro-drugs The compounds bearing the metabolically cleavable groups have the advantage that they may exhibit improved bioavailability as a result of enhanced solubility and/or rate of absoφtion conferred upon the parent compound by virtue of the presence of the metabolically cleavable group A thorough discussion of prodrugs is provided in the following Design of Prodrugs, H Bundgaard. ed , Elsevier, 1985, Methods in Enzymology, K Widder et al, Ed , Academic Press. 42, p 309-396, 1985, A Textbook of Drug Design and Development, Krogsgaard-Larsen and H Bundgaard ed , Chapter 5 "Design and Applications of Prodrugs" p 1 13- 191 1991 ; Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews, H. Bundgard, 8, p.1-38, 1992; Journal of Pharmaceutical Sciences, 77, p. 285, 1988; Chem. Pharm. Bull., N. Nakeya et al, 32, p. 692, 1984; Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems, T. Higuchi and V. Stella, Vol. 14 of the A.C.S. Symposium Series, and Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, Edward B. Roche, ed., American Pharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press, 1987, which are incoφorated herein by reference. Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to, acetate, formate and benzoate derivatives of alcohol and amine functional groups in the compounds of the invention.
The term "Therapeutically effective amounts" is meant to describe an amount of compound of the present invention effective in increasing the levels of serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine at the synapse and thus producing the desired therapeutic effect. Such amounts generally vary according to a number of factors well within the purview of ordinarily skilled artisans given the description provided herein to determine and account for. These include, without limitation: the particular subject, as well as its age, weight, height, general physical condition and medical history; the particular compound used, as well as the carrier in which it is formulated and the route of administration selected for it; and, the nature and severity of the condition being treated.
The term "Pharmaceutical composition" means a composition comprising a compound of formulae (IA-F) and at least one component selected from the group comprising pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, diluents, adjuvants, excipients, or vehicles, such as preserving agents, fillers, disintegrating agents, wetting agents, emulsifying agents, suspending agents, sweetening agents, flavoring agents, perfuming agents, antibacterial agents, antifungal agents, lubricating agents and dispensing agents, depending on the nature of the mode of administration and dosage forms. Examples of suspending agents include ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar and tragacanth, or mixtures of these substances. Prevention of the action of microorganisms can be ensured by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol. phenol, sorbic acid, and the like. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents, for example sugars, sodium chloride and the like. Prolonged absoφtion of the injectable pharmaceutical form can be brought about by the use of agents delaying absoφtion, for example, aluminum monosterate and gelatin. Examples of suitable carriers, diluents, solvents or vehicles include water, ethanol, polyols, suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils (such as olive oil) and injectable organic esters such as ethyl oleate. Examples of excipients include lactose, milk sugar, sodium citrate, calcium carbonate, dicalcium phosphate phosphate. Examples of disintegrating agents include starch, alginic acids and certain complex silicates. Examples of lubricants include magnesium stearate, sodium lauryl sulphate, talc, as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols. The term "Pharmaceutically acceptable" means it is, within the scope of sound medical judgement, suitable for use in contact with the cells of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
The term "Pharmaceutically acceptable dosage forms" means dosage forms of the compound of the invention, and includes, for example, tablets, dragees, powders, elixirs, syrups, liquid preparations, including suspensions, sprays, inhalants tablets, lozenges, emulsions, solutions, granules, capsules and suppositories, as well as liquid preparations for injections, including liposome preparations. Techniques and formulations generally may be found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, PA, latest edition.
PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IA-IF wherein: the carbon atom designated * is in the R or S configuration. Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IA. IB, IC, ID, IE and IF, wherein:
R' is C,-C6 alkyl, C,-C6 alkenyl, C,-C6 alkynyl, C,-^ cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl. -CN, -OR9 and -NR R'". Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IA, IB, IC, ID, IE and IF, wherein:
R2 is H, C,-C6 alkyl, C,-C6 alkenyl, C,-C6 alkynyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl, C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl or C,- C haloalkyl.
Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IA, wherein: R1 as C,-C6 alkyl. C,-C alkenyl, C,-C6 alkynyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl or C -C7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR9 and -NR9R"'.
Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IB, wherein: R' as -O(phenyl), -O(benzyl), -OC(O)R" or -S(O) R0 each of -O(ρhenyl) and -O(benzyl) optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C alkyl, C,-C haloalkyl or C,-C alkoxy.
Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IC, ID, IE and IF, wherein: R1 is H, halogen, -OR", -S(O) R12, -S(O)NR"R0 -CN, -C(O)R0 -C(O)NR"R0 -O(phenyl), - O(benzyl), -OC(0)R" or -S(O) R0 C,-C6 alkyl, C2-Cfi alkenyl, C,-Cfi alkynyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl and C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, wherein each of C,-C alkyl, C,-C alkenyl. C,-Cn alkynyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl and C -C cycloalkylalkyl is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from 0,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR9 and -NR9R0 and wherein R1 is a - O(phenyl) or -O(benzyl) group, then said group is optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl or C,-C4 alkoxy.
Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formula IC, wherein: R4 is C,-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C,-Cβ cycloalkyl, or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR" and -NR9R'". Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formula ID, wherein:
R4 is -O(phenyl), -O(benzyl), -OC(O)R0 -NR"R12 or -S(O) R0 and said -O(phenyl) or - O(benzyl) is optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl and C,-C4 alkoxy.
Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formula IA, IB, IE and IF, wherein: R4 is H, halogen, -OR", -S(O) R12, -S(O)NR"R0 -CN, -O(phenyl), -O(benzyl), -OC(O)R0 -
C(O)R0 -C(O)NR"R0 - NR"R0 C,-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-Cή alkynyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl and C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, wherein R4 is a C,-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-Cfi alkynyl, C,-C cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl group, then said group is optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C^C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR9 and -NR9R"', and wherein R4 a -(O)phenyl or -(O)benzyl group, then said group is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, and C,-C4 alkoxy.
Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IA, IB, IC, ID and IF, wherein: R\ R" and R1 are each independently H. halogen, -OR", -S(O) R0 -CN, -C(O)R0 -NR"R0 - C(O)NR"R0 -NR"C(O)R0 -NR"C(O) R0 -NR"C(O)NRI2R0 C,-C6 alkyl, C2-Cή alkenyl, C,-Cf alkynyl, C^C,. cycloalkyl or C -C7 cycloalkylalkyl, wherein each R\ R" and R7 is independently a C,-Cf alkyl, C2- C6 alkenyl, C,-Cf alkynyl, C1-C6 cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl group, then said group is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -ORu and -NR9RIU, or Rς and R" or R6 and R7 may be -0-C(R'2)2-0-. Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formula IE, wherein: when Rs is fluoro, chloro. or methyl; then R' and R" are each independently H, halogen, -OR", - S(O) R0 -CN, -C(O)R0 -NR"R12, -C(0)NR"R12, -NR"C(0)R12, -NRnC(O)2R0 -NR"C(O)NRI2R0 C,-C alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, wherein each of R and R" are a C,-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C -C6 alkynyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl orC4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl group, said group is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C3 alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR9 and -NR9R10, provided that R7is not fluoro, chloro, or methyl
Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formula IE, wherein:
R7 is fluoro, chloro or methyl, then R' and R6 together can also be -0-C(R12)2-0-. Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formula IE, wherein:
R' is fluoro, chloro or methyl, then R7 and R6 together can also be -0-C(R12)2-0-.
Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae LA-IE, wherein:
R8 is H, halogen, or OR".
Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formula IF, wherein R8 is halogen.
Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IA-F, wherein:
R9 and R1" are each independently H, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, C,-C4 alkoxyalkyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl, C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, -C(O)R0 phenyl or benzyl, where said phenyl or benzyl is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy; or
R9 and Rl() are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form piperidine, pyrrolidine, piperazine, N-methylpiperazine, moφholine, or thiomoφholine rings.
Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IA-F, wherein:
R" is H, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, C,-C4 alkoxyalkyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl, C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, -C(O)R0 phenyl or benzyl, where said phenyl or benzyl is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy.
Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IA-F, wherein:
R'2 is H, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, C,-C4 alkoxyalkyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl, C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, phenyl or benzyl, where said phenyl or benzyl is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl and C,-C alkoxy; or
R" and R12 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form piperidine, pyrrolidine, piperazine. N-methylpiperazine, moφholine or thiomoφholine rings. Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IA-F, wherein:
Rπ is C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl or phenyl; and n is 0, 1 , or 2.
Another embodiment of the invention is a compound of formulae IA-F, wherein: substituents R'-R" are as set forth in the following table: Table A
Figure imgf000014_0001
Table A (continued)
Figure imgf000015_0001
Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of fomullae LA-IF, wherein:
R' is C,-C, alkyl;
R2 is H, C,-C4 alkyl or C,-C„ haloalkyl. Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IA, IC, ID, IE and IF, wherein:
R' is C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of these groups being optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl. halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR9 and -NR9R'°.
Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formula IB, wherein:
R1 is -O(phenyl) or -O(benzyl), is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy. Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IC, ID, IE and IF: wherein R1 is -O(phenyl) or -O(benzyl), and is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, and C,-C alkoxy.
Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IC-IF, wherein: R' is H.
Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IA, IB, IC, IE and IF, wherein:
R4 is C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of these groups being optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from 0,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR9 and -NR*R'".
Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IA, IB, IE and IF, wherein:
R4 is H.
Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IA, IB, IE and IF, wherein:
R4 is -NR"R0 -O(phenyl) or -O(benzyl), each of these aryl groups being is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy.
Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IE and IF, wherein:
R' and R4 are both halogen.
Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IA, IB, IC, ID and IF, wherein:
R\ R" and R7 are each H, halogen, -OR", -NR"R0 C,-Cβ alkyl or C,-C6 alkyl optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR9 and -NR R'".
Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IA, IB, IC, ID, IE and IF, wherein: Rs is fluoro, chloro or methyl; one of R6 or R7 is H; and the other of R6 or R7 which is not H is halogen, -OR", -NRHR12, C,-C6 alkyl or CI-C6 alkyl each of which is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR9 and - NR9R0
Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IA, IB, IC, ID and IE, wherein:
R8 is H or halogen.
Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formula IF, wherein: R8 is halogen.
Preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds of formulae IA, IB, IC, ID, IE and IF, wherein: the substituents R'-R8 are as set forth in the following table B:
Table B
Figure imgf000018_0001
More preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds wherein: R1 is CrC, alkyl; R2 is H or C,-C, alkyl;
R' is H, C,-C4 alkyl, -O(phenyl) or optionally substituted -O(phenyl), more preferably halogen; R4 is H, C,-C4 alkyl, -O(phenyl) or optionally substituted -O(phenyl), more preferably halogen;
Rs is F, Cl or Me, more preferably -OR", wherein R" is C,-C, alkyl; R6 is H or more preferably Cl, F, C,-C, alkyl, halo-substituted C,-C, alkyl, or -OR", R" is C,-C, alkyl or -NR"R12;
R7 is H or more preferably Cl, F, C,-C, alkyl or -OR", wherein R" is C,-C, alkyl. A further more preferred embodiments of this invention are compounds wherein:
R' is CH,; R2 is H or CH,;
R1 is H, CH,, or -O(phenyl) or -0-CH2-(phenyl), each of said -O(phenyl) or -0-CH2-(phenyl) is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy;
R4 is H, F, CH„ CH2CH,, CH2CH2CH„ CH2CH(CH,)CH„ -O(phenyl) or -0-CH2-phenyl, where each of said -O(phenyl) or -0-CH,-(phenyl) is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy; R0s H, CH,, OCH„ F or Cl ;
R" is H, CH„ -OCH„ F, Cl or CF,; R7 is H, F, Cl. CH, or OCH,; and R8 is halogen.
90
H-. o e C2 < o
H U
00 oil HH HH HH MH ffi E HH K K HH HH ffi HH ^H HH HH HU Ε H h-H »H HH HH H-. HH HH 3-t
-a c
3 O HH HH HH ^^ HH HH HH HH ^^ H HH HH ^ H H HH ^*-i * 4 HH HH -^ * 4 o υ
2 , ω — 22 <" _ _ c _o c > c4 ffi ffi X HH H S U U K &. K H U Ϊ H X H. H H. PH U I IΪ E ffi ϋ ffi
υ s
I ω
(4 22 2 22222222 W W fc HH HH HH HH [-H U <J 2 K K o
X) 3
Figure imgf000020_0001
ad HH HM HH MH hH HH HH HH >^ HH HH HH HH HH HH HH S K HH HH ffi HH HH ^Sϊ
O «l 22222222222222222222222 2222 .
,3 a
ID 0 I,
Pi
Figure imgf000020_0002
Figure imgf000021_0001
Table C (continued)
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8
Me H H Me F H Cl H
Me H H H F F F H
Me H H H F H H H
Me H H H F Me H H
Me H H H Me F H H
Me H H H F F H H
Me H H H Cl H H H
Me H H H F Cl H H
Me H H H Cl F H H
Me H H H CN H H H
Me H H H H NHCOMe H H
Me H H H H Cl H F
Me Me H Me F H F H
Me H H Me F F F H
Et H H Me H F H H
Me H H Me H F H OH
Me H F CH,Me H H H H
Me H H CH^NH2H H H H
Me H H CH^NHMe H H H H
Me H OH CN H H H H
Me H H CH2OH H H H H
Et H H H H H H H
That is, the specifically preferred compounds are:
2,7-dimethyl-4-phenyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; 4-(4-methoxy)phenyl-2,7-dimethyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
2,7-dimethyl-4-(4-fluoro)phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
2,7-dimethyl-4-(3-fluoro)phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(3,4-difluoro)phenyl-2,7-dimethyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
2,7-dimethyl-4-(4-fluoro-3-methyl)phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; 4-(3-chloro-4-fluoro)phenyl-2,7-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(3-chloro)phenyl-2,7-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
2,7-dimethyl-4-(4-methyl)phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
2,7-dimethyl-4-(3-fluoro-4-methyl)phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(4-chloro)phenyl-2,7-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; 4-(4-chloro-3-fluoro)phenyl-2,7-dimethyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(3,4-dichloro)phenyl-2,7-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
7-ethyl-2-methyl-4-pheny 1- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(3,4-difluoro)phenyl-7-ethyl-2-methyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -fluoro-4-(4-methoxy)phenyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -fluoro-4-(3-fluoro-4-methoxy)phenyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -fluoro-4-(3-fluoro-4-methyl)phenyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -fluoro-4-(4-chloro-3-fluoro)phenyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,4-difluoro)phenyl-7-fluoro-2-methy 1- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-chloro)phenyl-7-fluoro-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -cyano-2-methyl-4-phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -methyl-4-phenyl-7-trifluoromethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -phenyl- l,2,7-trimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(4-chloro)phenyl-l,2-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,4-difluoro)phenyl- 1 ,2-dimethy 1- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -phenyl-2,7,8-trifluoromethyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,7-dimethyl-8-fluoro-4-phenyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,8-dimethyI-7-fluoro-4-phenyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,7-dimethyl-8-methoxy-4-phenyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,7-dimethyl-8-hydroxy-4-phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -methyl-4-phenyl-7-trifluoromethoxy-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,4-difluoro)phenyl-7-methoxy-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(4-fluoro-3-methyl)phenyl-7-methoxy-2-methyl- l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-fluoro-4-methyl)phenyl-7-methoxy-2-methyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -methoxy-4-(3-methyl)phenyl-2-methyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -methyl-7-phenoxy-4-phenyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(4-methoxy)phenoxy-2-methyl-4-phenyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -benzyloxy-2-methyl-4-phenyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -hydroxy-2-methyl-4-(3-methyl)phenyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-fluoro-4-methyl)phenyl-7-hydroxy-2-methyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(4-fluoro-3-methyl)phenyl-7-hydroxy-2-methyl- l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,4-difluoro)phenyl-7-hydroxy-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-cyano)phenyl-2-methyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,8-dimethyl-4-pheny 1- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,8-dimethyl-4-(4-fluoro)phenyl-l ,2.3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,4-difluoro)phenyl-2,8-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,5-difluoro)phenyl-2,8-dimethyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,8-dimethyl-4-(3-fluoro)phenyl-l,2.3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,8-dimethyl-4-(4-fluoro-3-methyl)phenyl- 1 ,2.3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-chloro-4-fluoro)phenyl-2,8-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,4-dichloro)phenyl-2,8-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-chloro)phenyl-2,8-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(4-chloro)phenyl-2,8-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(4-chloro-3-fluoro)phenyl-2,8-dimethyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,8-dimethyl-4-(4-methoxy)phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(4-cyano)phenyl-2,8-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,8-dimethyl-4-(4-trifluoromethyl)phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,8-dimethyl-4-(4-methyl)phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -methyl-8-(N-methylamino)methy 1-4-phenyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(hydroxy)methyl-2-methyl-4-phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -methyl-4-phenyl-8-sulfonamide-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -methyl-8-(N-methyl)sulfonamide-4-phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -methoxy-2-methyl-4-(4-methyl)phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,5-difluoro)pheny l-8-methoxy-2-methyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-chloro)phenyl-8-methoxy-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,4-dichloro)phenyl-8-methoxy-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(4-chloro-3-fluoro)phenyl-8-methoxy-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-chloro-4-fluoro)phenyl-8-methoxy-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,5-difluoro)phenyl-2-methyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-chloro-5-fluoro)phenyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,5-difluoro)phenyl-2,7-dimethyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-chloro-5-fluoro)phenyl-2,7-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -methyl-4-(3,4,5-trifluoro)phenyl- l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-fluoro)phenyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-fluoro-4-methyl)phenyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(4-fluoro-3-methyl)phenyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,4-difluoro)phenyl-2-methyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(3-chloro)phenyl-2-methyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; 4-(4-chloro-3-fluoro)phenyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(3-chloro-4-fluoro)phenyl-2-methyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(3-cyano)phenyl-2-methyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(4-acetanilide)-2-methyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(4-chloro)phenyl-4-fluoro-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; (3,5-difluoro)-4-phenyl-l,2,7-trimethyl-l,2,3.4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; (8-fluoro-2-methyl-4-phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydro-7-ιsoquinohnyl)-N-methylmethanamine; (2-methyl-4-phenyl-7-isoquιnolinyl)-N-methylmethanamιne; N-methyl(2-methyl-4-phenyl-7-ιsoquιnohnyl)-N-methylmethanamine; 8-hydroxy-2-methyl-4-phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydro-7-ιsoquinolinecarbonιtπle; (2-methyl-4-phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydro-7-ιsoquinohnyl)methanol; and 2-ethyl-4-phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroιsoquιnohne; or an oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, a solvate thereof, or prodrug thereof.
Further more preferred compound of this invention include those (+) enantiomers of compounds of formulae IA-IF, selected from table D:
TABLE D
Figure imgf000025_0001
D
Figure imgf000025_0002
Another preferred aspect of the invention is a mixture of compounds of formulae (IA-F) wherein the compound of formulae (IA-F) is radiolabeled, i.e., wherein one or more of the atoms described are replaced by a radioactive isotope of that atom (e.g , C replaced by l C and H replaced by 3H). Such compounds have a variety of potential uses, e.g., as standards and reagents in determining the ability of a potential pharmaceutical to bind to neurotransmitter proteins.
Another aspect of the invention is a therapeutically effective amount of the compound of formulae (IA-F) and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Another aspect of the invention is a method of treating a disorder which is created by or is dependent upon decreased availability of serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine, which comprises administering to a patient in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Another aspect of the invention is a method of treating a disorder which is created by or is dependent upon decreased availability of serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine, which comprises administering to a patient in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and a therapeutically effective amount of a serotonin 1 A receptor antagonist, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Another aspect of the invention is a method of treating a disorder which is created by or is dependent upon decreased availability of serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine, which comprises administering to a patient in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and a therapeutically effective amount of a compound selected from the group consisting of WAY 100135 and spiperone, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. WAY 100135 (N-(t-butyl)-3-[a-(2-methoxyphenyl)piperazin-l-yl]-2-phenylpropanamide) is disclosed in Abou-Gharbia et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,988,814,as having an affinity for the 5-HT receptor. Also, Cliffe et al., J. Med. Chem. 36, 1509- 10 ( 1993) showed that the compound is a 5-HT antagonist. Spiperone (8-[4-(4-fluorophenyl)-4-oxobutyl]- l -phenyl- 1 , 3, 8-triazaspiro[4,5]decan-4- one) is a well- known compound, and is diclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3, 155,669 and 3,155,670. The activity of Spiperone as a 5-HT antagonist is shown in Middlemiss et al., Neurosci. and Biobehav. Rev. 16, 75-82 (1992). Another aspect of the invention is a method of treating a disorder which is created by or is dependent upon decreased availability of serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine, which comprises administering to a patient in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F) , or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and a therapeutically effective amount of a selective neurokinin- 1 receptor antagonist, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Neurokinin-1 receptor antagonists of use in combination a compound of formulae (IA-F) in the present invention, are fully described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,373,003, 5,387,595, 5,459,270, 5,494,926, 5,162,339, 5,232,929, 5,242,930, 5,496,833, 5,637,699; PCT International Patent Publication Nos. WO 90/05525, 90/05729, 94/02461 , 94/02595, 94/03429,94/03445, 94/04494, 94/04496, 94/05625, 94/07843, 94/08997. 94/10165. 94/10167. 94/10168, 94/10170, 94/1 1368. 94/13639, 94/13663, 94/14767,94/15903, 94/19320, 94/19323, 94/20500, 91/09844, 91/18899, 92/01688, 92/06079, 92/12151,92/15585, 92/17449, 92/20661, 92/20676, 92/21677, 92/22569, 93/00330, 93/00331, 93/01159, 93/01165, 93/01169, 93/01170, 93/06099, 93/09116,93/10073, 93/14084, 93/14113, 93/18023, 93/19064, 93/21155, 93/21181, 93/23380, 93/24465, 94/00440, 94/01402, 94/26735, 94/26740, 94/29309, 95/02595, 95/04040, 95/04042, 95/06645, 95/07886, 95/07908, 95/08549,95/11880, 95/14017, 95/15311, 95/16679, 95/17382, 95/18124, 95/18129, 95/19344, 95/20575, 95/21819, 95/22525, 95/23798, 95/26338, 95/28418, 95/30674, 95/30687, 95/33744, 96/05181, 96/05193, 96/05203, 96/06094, 96/07649, 96/10562, 96/16939, 96/18643, 96/20197, 96/21661, 96/29304,96/29317, 96/29326, 96/29328, 96/31214, 96/32385, 96/37489, 97/01553, 97/01554, 97/03066, 97/08144, 97/14671, 97/17362, 97/18206, 97/19084,97/19942, 97/21702, and 97/49710; and in U.K. Patent Application Nos. 2 266 529, 2 268 931 , 2 269 170, 2 269 590, 2 271 774, 2 292 144, 2 293168, 2 293 169, and 2 302 689; European Patent Publication Nos. EP 0 360 390, 0517 589, 0 520 555, 0 522 808, 0 528 495, 0 532 456, 0 533 280, 0 536 817, 0 545 478, 0 558 156, 0 577 394, 0 585 913. 0 590 152, 0 599 538, 0610 793, 0 634 402, 0 686629, 0693 489, 0 694 535. 0 699 655, 0 394 989, 0428 434, 0429 366, 0430771, 0436 334, 0443 132, 0 482 539, 0 498 069, 0 499 313, 0 512 901, 0 512 902, 0 514 273, 0 514 274, 0 514 275, 0 514 276, 0 515 681 , 0 699 674, 0 707 006, 0 708 101, 0 709 375, 0 709 376, 0 714 891 , 0 723 959, 0733 632 and 0 776 893. The preparation of such compounds are fully described in the aforementioned patents and publications.
Another aspect of the invention is a method of treating a disorder which is created by or is dependent upon decreased availability of serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine, which comprises administering to a patient in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F) , or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and a therapeutically effective amount of a norepinephrine precursor, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Another aspect of the invention is a method of treating a disorder which is created by or is dependent upon decreased availability of serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine, which comprises administering to a patient in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F) , or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and a therapeutically effective amount of a compound selected from L-tyrosine and L-phenylalanine, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. Another aspect of the invention is a method of treating a disorder referred to in the above- mentioned embodiments, wherein the disorder is selected from the group: attention deficit disorder, hyperactivity disorder, anxiety, depression, post-traumatic stress disorder, supranuclear palsy, eating disorders, obsessive compulsive disorder, analgesia, nicotine addiction, panic attacks, Parkinsonism and phobia, obesity, late luteal phase syndrome or narcolepsy, ***e addiction, amphetamine addiction, and psychiatric symptoms anger such as, rejection sensitivity, and lack of mental or physical energy. Another aspect of the invention is a method of inhibiting synaptic norepinephπne uptake in a patient in need thereof compπsing administering a therapeutically effective inhibitory amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F)
Another aspect of the invention is a method of inhibiting synaptic serotonin uptake in a patient in need thereof comprising administering a therapeutically effective inhibitory amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F)
Another aspect of the invention is a method of inhibiting synaptic dopamine uptake in a patient in need thereof comprising administering a therapeutically effective inhibitory amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F) Another aspect of the invention is a therapeutic method described herein wherein the (+)- stereoisomer of the compound of formulae (IA-F) is employed
Another aspect of the invention is a therapeutic method described herein wherein the (-)- stereoisomer of the compound of formulae (IA-F) is employed
Another aspect of the invention is a kit comprising a compound of formulae (IA-F) and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a serotonin 1 A receptor antagonist compound, a selective neurokιnιn-1 receptor antagonist compound, and a norepinephrine precursor compound
Another aspect of the invention is a method of treating depression in a patient in need thereof comprising inhibiting synaptic serotonin and norepinephrine uptake by administering a therapeutically effective inhibitory amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F) which functions as both a serotonin and norepinephrine uptake inhibitor
Another aspect of the invention is a method of treating depression in a patient in need thereof comprising inhibiting synaptic serotonin and dopamine uptake by administering a therapeutically effective inhibitory amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F) which functions as both a serotonin and dopamine uptake inhibitor Another aspect of the invention is a method of treating depression in a patient in need thereof comprising inhibiting synaptic dopamine and norepinephrine uptake by administering a therapeutically effective inhibitory amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F) which functions as both a dopamine and norepinephrine uptake inhibitor
Another aspect of the invention is a method for inhibiting serotonin uptake in mammals which comprises administering to a mammal requiring increased neurotransmission of serotonin a pharmaceutically effective amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F)
Another aspect of the invention is a method for inhibiting dopamine uptake in patients which comprises administering to a mammal requiring increased neurotransmission of dopamine a pharmaceutically effective amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F) Another aspect of the invention is a method for inhibiting norepinephrine uptake in patients which comprises administering to a mammal requiring increased neurotransmission of norepinephrine a pharmaceutically effective amount of a compound of formulae (IA-F) .
Another aspect of the invention is a method of suppressing the desire of humans to smoke comprising administering to a human in need of such suppression an effective dose, to relieve the desire to smoke, of a compound of formulae (IA-F) .
Another aspect of the invention is a method of suppressing the desire of humans to consume alcohol comprising administering to a human in need of such suppression an effective dose, to relieve the desire to consume alcohol, of a compound of formulae (IA-F) . It is appreciated that certain feactures of the invention, which are, for clarity, described in the context of separate embodiments, may also be provided in combination in a single embodiment. Conversely, various feactures of the invention which are, for brevity, described in the context of a single embodiment, may also be provided seperately or in any suitable subcombination.
Preparation of Compounds of the Invention
Compounds according to the invention, for example, starting materials, intermediates or products, are prepared as described herein or by the application or adaptation of known methods, by which is meant methods used heretofore or described in the literature.
Compounds useful according to the invention may be prepared by the application or adaptation of known methods, by which is meant methods used heretofore or described in the literature, for example those described by R. C. Larock in Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH publishers, 1989.
A compound of formulae (IA-F) including a group containing one or more nitrogen ring atoms, may be converted to the corresponding compound wherein one or more nitrogen ring atom of the group is oxidized to an N-oxide, preferably by reacting with a peracid, for example peracetic acid in acetic acid or m-chloroperoxybenzoic acid in an inert solvent such as dichloromethane, at a temperature from about room temperature to reflux, preferably at elevated temperature.
In the reactions described hereinafter it may be necessary to protect reactive functional groups, for example hydroxy, amino, imino, thio or carboxy groups, where these are desired in the final product, to avoid their unwanted participation in the reactions. Conventional protecting groups may be used in accordance with standard practice, for examples see T.W. Green and P.G.M.Wuts in "Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry" John Wiley and Sons, 1991 ; J. F. W. McOmie in "Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry" Plenum Press, 1973.
Compounds provided herein are synthesized, for example, using the methods described below (see Schemes 1-4), together with methods known in the art of synthetic organic chemistry, or variations thereon as appreciated by those skilled in the art Preferred methods include, but are not limited to, those methods descnbed below
Compounds of formulae (IA-F) of this invention are, for example, prepared according to Scheme 1 Treatment of an optionally substituted acetophenone of formula (II) with common brominating agents such as, but not limited to, bromine, NBS, or tetrabutylammonium tribromide readily affords the desired bromoacetophenones of formula (III, X=Br) These reactions are optimally conducted in acetic acid or methylene chloride with methanol used as a co-solvent for the tribromide reagent with reaction temperatures at or below room temperature Another embodiment of this methodology would include compounds of formula (III, X=C1) The acetophenones of formula (II) are available from commercial sources or are conveniently obtained via several well known methods, including the treatment of the corresponding benzoic acid intermediates with two stoichiometπc equivalents of methyllithium as thoroughly described in the review of Jorgenson, M J {Organic Reactions, 1970, 18, pg 1 ) Alternatively, one may treat the corresponding benzaldehydes with an alkyl-Grignard (for example, MeMgBr) or alkyl-lithium (for example, MeLi) nucleophile follwed by routine oxidation to the ketone as well demonstrated by Larock, R C (Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers, New York, 1989, p 604)
Treatment of intermediates of formula (III) with intermediates of formula
Figure imgf000030_0001
NHR1 cleanly generates the alkylation products of formula (V) The alkylation reactions may be run under a wide variety of conditions familiar to one skilled in the art of organic synthesis Typical solvents include acetonitπle, toluene, diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, dimethylsulfoxide, dimethylformamide, methylene chloride, and lower alkyl alcohols including ethanol The reactions may be successfully run at temperatures ranging from 0°C up to the boiling point of the solvent employed Reaction progress is conventionally determined by standard chromatographic and spectroscopic methods The alkylation reaction is optionally run with the addition of a non-nucleophihc organic base such as, but not limited to, pyπdine, triethylamine and dnsopropyl ethylamine
The R0substituted N-benzyl amines of formula (R3,R4-Ph)-CH(R2)-NHR1 may be purchased from commercial sources, or alternatively, obtained from a simple reductive animation protocol Thus carbonyl containing compounds of Formulae (IV, Scheme 1 ) may be treated with H2N-R1 in lower alkyl alcoholic solvents (preferably methanol) at temperatures at or below room temperature The resulting imme may be reduced most commonly with alkaline earth borohydrides (preferably sodium borohydride) to provide the desired amine intermediate
Reductions of compounds of formula (V) to the benzyl alcohols of formula (VI) proceeds with many reducing agents including, as example, sodium borohydride, lithium borohydride, borane, diisobutylaluminum hvdπde. and lithium aluminum hydride The reductions are carried out for a period of time between 1 hour to 3 days at room temperature or elevated temperature up to the reflux point of the solvent employed. If borane is used, it may be employed as a complex for example, but not limited to, borane-methyl sulfide complex, borane-piperidine complex, borane-tetrahydrofuran complex. One skilled in the art will understand the optimal combination of reducing agents and reaction conditions needed or may seek guidance from the text of Larock, R.C. {Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers, New York, 1989, p. 527).
Compounds of formula (VI) may be cyclized to the target compounds of formulae LA-IF of this invention by brief treatment with a strong acid. Suitable acids include, but are not limited to, concentrated sulfuric acid, polyphosphoric acid, methanesulfonic acid and trifluoroacetic acid. The reactions are run neat or in the optional presence of a co-solvent such as, for example, methylene chloride and 1 ,2-dichloroethane. The cyclizations may be conducted at temperatures ranging from 0°C up to the reflux point of the solvent employed. One skilled in the art of heterocyclic chemistry will readily understand these conditions or may consult the teachings of Mondeshka, et al. (11 Farmaco, 1994, 49, 475-480) or Venkov, et al. (Synthesis, 1990, 253-255). Cyclizations may also be effected by treatment of compounds of formula (VI) with strong Lewis Acids, such as for example, aluminum trichloride typically in halogenated solvents such as methylene chloride. One skilled in the art will be familiar with the precedent taught by Kaiser, et al. (J. Med. Chem., 1984, 27, 28-35) and Wyrick, et al. (J. Med. Chem., 1981, 24, 1013-1015).
Compounds of formulae IA-IF may be obtained in enantiomerically pure (R) and (S) form by crystallization with chiral salts as well known to one skilled in the art, or alternatively, may be isolated through chiral HPLC employing commercially available chiral columns.
Alternatively, compounds of formulae (V) and (VI) may be arrived at as described in Scheme 2.
Thus, the haloacetophenones of formula may be treated with simple amines of formula H2N-R1 under alkylation conditions as described above (vide supra) to provide compounds of formulae (VII). A second alkylation may then be performed utilizing reagents of formula (VIII) where X represents a leaving group, such as for example, but not limited to, halogen, mesylate, or tosylate to afford the common intermediate of formula (V). Reagents of formula (VIII) are in turn available from the appropriately substituted carbonyl compound of formula (IV) via reduction (vide supra) and activation. Activation to leaving group X is effected by treatment of the alcohol with methanesulfonyl chloride or /j-toluenesulfonyl chloride in the presence of a non-nucleophilic base such as, but not limited to, l,5-diazabicyclo[4.3.0]non-5-ene (DBN), pyridine or triethylamine. The reaction is commonly performed in halogenated organic solvent, for example, methylene chloride, and at temperatures from -
78°C up to the boiling point of the solvent employed. Benzylic activation to Leaving Group X may also be effected by treatment with halogenating agents such as, but not limited to, SOoCb, CI2, PCI5, Br2, CuBr2, NBS, and CBr The various conditions necessary to accomplish this transformation will be readily apparent to those skilled in the art of organic chemistry and additional reference on benzylic activiation may be sought from Larock, R.C. (Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers, New York, 1989, p. 313). The flexibility of the synthesis is further demonstrated by an alternative sequence of reactions, wherein (VII) may be reduced (vide supra) and either i) alkylated as above with (VIII) to afford (VI) or ii) condensed with (IV) followed by in-situ imine reduction to also afford (VI). Where R^=R"=R'=H, and the (methylaminomethyl)benzyl alcohol derivative may be obtained from commercial sources.
Compounds of formulae IA-IF of this invention may also be prepared according to Scheme 3. Treatment of an appropriately substituted 2-iodobenzaldehyde (or a 2-bromobenzaldehyde) (X) with an amine H2N-R1 in lower alkyl alcohol solvents followed by reduction of the resultant imine as described above in Scheme 1 (vide supra) affords an intermediate (2-1 or Br),R ,R^-PhCH2-NH-R1 which, when treated with an optionally substituted bromoacetophenone (as described for the synthesis of (V), Scheme 1 ) provides the alkylation product (XI). Compounds of formula (XI) may be treated with strong bases, such as, but not limited to lower alkyl {C\_ ) lithium bases (preferably t-BuLi or n-BuLi) to afford the anticipated halogen-metal exchange followed by intramolecular Barbier cyclization to generate compounds of formulae (IA-IE,
R8=0H). Inert solvents such as dialkyl ethers (preferably diethyl ether), cyclic ethers (preferably tetrahydrofuran or 1 ,4-dioxane). etc. are necessary, and reaction temperatures are kept low (-78°C to - 25°C) to avoid by-products. Alternatively, halogen-metal exchange may also be effected in the presence of zerovalent nickel, in which case N,N-dialkylformamides (preferably dimethylformamide) serve as ideal solvents. One skilled in the art of organic synthesis will understand the optimal combination of conditions and may seek further reference from Kihara, et al. (Tetrahedron, 1992, 48. 67-78), and Blomberg, et al. (Synthesis. 1977, p. 18-30). Additionally, compounds of formulae (IA-E, Rh=OH) may be readily alkylated (vide supra) to afford compounds formulae (IA-E,
Figure imgf000032_0001
' ). Finally, further treatment of compounds of formulae (IA-E, R^=OH) with a halogenating reagent or specifically a fluorinating reagent such as, but not limited to, diethylaminosulfur trifluoride (DAST), readily provides compounds of formulae (IA-F. R°=F). Further reference may be gained from the review of Hudlick) (Organic Reactions. 1985, 35, p. 513-637). Compounds of formulae IA-F of this invention may also be prepared according to Scheme 4. 4-
Bromoisoquinolines (XII) may be treated with an aryl boronic acid or aryl boronic acid ester where Y is equivalent to B(OHb or B(ORa)(OR'3) (where Ra and R*0 are lower alkyl, ie. Ci -Cβ. or taken together, Ra and RD are lower alkylene. ie. C2-C12) in the presence of a metal catalyst with or without a base in an inert solvent to give isoquinoline compounds of formula (XIII). Metal catalysts include, but are not limited to, salts or phosphine complexes of Cu, Pd, or Ni (eg. Cu(OAc)2, PdC^PPh ^, NiCl2(PPh3)2)- Bases may include, but are not limited to, alkaline earth metal carbonates, alkaline earth metal bicarbonates, alkaline earth metal hydroxides, alkali metal carbonates, alkali metal bicarbonates, alkali metal hydroxides, alkali metal hydrides (preferably sodium hydride), alkali metal alkoxides (preferably sodium methoxide or sodium ethoxide), alkaline earth metal hydrides, alkali metal dialkylamides (preferably lithium diisopropylamide), alkali metal bis(trialkylsilyl)amides (preferably sodium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide), trialkyl amines (preferably diisopropylethylamine or triethylamine) or aromatic amines (preferably pyridine). Inert solvents may include, but are not limited to acetonitrile, dialkyl ethers (preferably diethyl ether), cyclic ethers (preferably tetrahydrofuran or 1 ,4-dioxane), N,N- dialkylacetamides (preferably dimethylacetamide), N,N-dialkylformamides (preferably dimethylformamide), dialkylsulfoxides (preferably dimethylsulfoxide), aromatic hydrocarbons (preferably benzene or toluene) or haloaalkanes (preferably methylene chloride). Prefered reaction temperatures range from room temperature up to the boiling point of the solvent employed. The reactions may be run in conventional glassware or in one of many commercially available parallel synthesizer units. Non-commercially available boronic acids or boronic acid esters may be obtained from the corresponding optionally substituted aryl halide as described by Gao, et al. (Tetrahedron, 1994, 50, 979-988).
Compounds of formula (XIII) are converted into the target tetrahydroisoquinolines of formula via a two-step procedure employing first amine quaternization with a reagent R'-LG, where LG represents a suitable leaving group such as I, Br, O-triflate. O-tosylate, O-methanesulfonate, etc. The reactions are optimally conducted in haloaalkanes (preferably methylene chloride), dialkyl ethers (preferably diethyl ether), cyclic ethers (preferably tetrahydrofuran or 1 ,4-dioxane) or other inert solvent. The reactions are optimally conducted at or below room temperature and reaction times vary from 10 minutes to 24 hours. The second step of the sequence involves reduction to the tetrahydroisoquinolines of formulae IA-F. Optimally, a mild reducing agent is employed, such as for example, sodium cyanoborohydride in the presence of acid catalyst to facilitate the reaction. Additional guidance for effectively conducting this chemistry may be located from the works of Miller, et al. (Synthetic Communications. 1994, 24, 1 187-1 193) and Terashi a. et al. (Heterocycles, 1987, 26. 1603-1610). Scheme 1
Figure imgf000034_0001
III
Figure imgf000034_0002
VI
Figure imgf000034_0003
I (R =H) Scheme 2
Figure imgf000035_0001
III VII
Figure imgf000035_0002
IX
Scheme 3
Figure imgf000036_0001
X XI
Figure imgf000036_0002
I (R =H)
Scheme 4
Figure imgf000036_0003
XII XIII It will be appreciated that compounds useful according to the present invention may contain asymmetric centres. These asymmetric centres may independently be in either the R or S configuration and such compounds are able to rotate a plane of polarized light in a polarimeter. If said plane of polarized light is caused by the compound to rotate in a counterclockwise direction, the compound is said to be the (-) stereoisomer of the compound. If said plane of polarized light is caused by the compound to rotate in a clockwise direction, the compound is said to be the (+) stereoisomer of the compound. It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that certain compounds useful according to the invention may also exhibit geometrical lsomeπsm It is to be understood that the present invention includes individual geometrical isomers and stereoisomers and mixtures thereof, including racemic mixtures, of compounds of formulae (IA-F) hereinabove Such isomers can be separated from their mixtures, by the application or adaptation of known methods, for example chromatographic techniques and recrystalhsation techniques, or they are separately prepared from the appropriate isomers of their intermediates Radiolabelled compounds of the invention are synthesized by a number of means well known to those of ordinary skill in the art, e.g., by using starting materials incorporating therein one or more radioisotopes This invention provides compositions containing the compounds described herein, including, in particular, pharmaceutical compositions comprising therapeutically effective amounts of the compounds and pharmaceutically acceptable carriers
It is a further object of the invention to provide kits having a plurality of active ingredients (with or without carrier) which, together, may be effectively utilized for carrying out the novel combination therapies of the invention
It is another object of the invention to provide a novel pharmaceutical compositions which is effective, in and of itself, for utilization in a beneficial combination therapy because it includes a plurality of active ingredients which may be utilized in accordance with the invention The invention also provides kits or single packages combining two or more active ingredients useful in treating a disorder described herein A kit may provide (alone or in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier), the compound of formulae (IA-F) and the additional active ingredient (alone or in combination with diluent or carrier) selected from a serotonin 1 A receptor antagonist, a selective neurokιnιn-1 receptor antagonist, and a norepinephrine precursor In practice compounds of the present invention may generally be administered parenterally. intravenously, subcutaneously intramuscularly, colonically, nasally, intraperitoneally, rectally or orally
The products according to the invention may be presented in forms permitting administration by the most suitable route and the invention also relates to pharmaceutical compositions containing at least one product according to the invention which are suitable for use in human or veterinary medicine These compositions may be prepared according to the customary methods, using one or more pharmaceutically acceptable adjuvants or excipients The adjuvants comprise, inter alia, diluents, sterile aqueous media and the various non-toxic organic solvents The compositions may be presented in the form of tablets, pills, granules, powders, aqueous solutions or suspensions, injectable solutions, elixirs or syrups, and can contain one or more agents chosen from the group comprising sweeteners, flavorings, colorings, or stabilizers in order to obtain pharmaceutically acceptable preparations
The choice of vehicle and the content of active substance in the vehicle are generally determined in accordance with the solubility and chemical properties of the product, the particular mode of administration and the provisions to be observed in pharmaceutical practice For example, excipients such as lactose, sodium citrate, calcium carbonate, dicalcium phosphate and disintegrating agents such as starch, alginic acids and certain complex silicates combined with lubricants such as magnesium stearate, sodium lauryl sulfate and talc may be used for preparing tablets To prepare a capsule, it is advantageous to use lactose and high molecular weight polyethylene glycols When aqueous suspensions are used they can contain emulsifying agents or agents which facilitate suspension Diluents such as sucrose, ethanol, polyethylene glycol, propylene glycol, glycerol and chloroform or mixtures thereof may also be used For parenteral administration, emulsions, suspensions or solutions of the products according to the invention in vegetable oil, for example sesame oil, groundnut oil or olive oil, or aqueous-organic solutions such as water and propylene glycol, injectable organic esters such as ethyl oleate, as well as sterile aqueous solutions of the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, are used The solutions of the salts of the products according to the invention are especially useful for administration by intramuscular or subcutaneous injection The aqueous solutions, also comprising solutions of the salts in pure distilled water, may be used for intravenous administration with the proviso that their pH is suitably adjusted, that they are judiciously buffered and rendered isotonic with a sufficient quantity of glucose or sodium chloride and that they are sterilized bv heating, irradiation or microfiltration
Suitable compositions containing the compounds of the invention may be prepared by conventional means For example, compounds of the invention may be dissolved or suspended in a suitable carrier for use in a nebulizer or a suspension or solution aerosol, or may be absorbed or adsorbed onto a suitable solid carrier for use in a dry powder inhaler
Solid compositions for rectal administration include suppositories formulated in accordance with known methods and containing at least one compound of formulae (IA-F) The percentage of active ingredient in the compositions of the invention may be varied, it being necessary that it should constitute a proportion such that a suitable dosage shall be obtained Obviously, several unit dosage forms may be administered at about the same time The dose employed will be determined by the physician, and depends upon the desired therapeutic effect, the route of administration and the duration of the treatment, and the condition of the patient In the adult, the doses are generally from about 0 01 to about 100, preferably about 0 01 to about 10, mg/kg body weight per day by inhalation, from about 0 01 to about 100, preferably 0 1 to 70, more especially 0 5 to 10, mg/kg body weight per day by oral administration, and from about 0 01 to about 50, preferably 0 01 to 10, mg/kg body weight per day by intravenous administration In each particular case, the doses will be determined in accordance with the factors distinctive to the subject to be treated, such as age, weight, general state of health and other characteristics which can influence the efficacy of the medicinal product
The products according to the invention may be administered as frequently as necessary in order to obtain the desired therapeutic effect Some patients may respond rapidly to a higher or lower dose and may find much weaker maintenance doses adequate For other patients, it may be necessary to have long-term treatments at the rate of 1 to 4 doses per day, in accordance with the physiological requirements of each particular patient Generally, the active product may be administered orally 1 to 4 times per day It goes without saying that, for other patients, it will be necessary to prescribe not more than one or two doses per day
The present invention provides compounds which inhibit synaptic norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin uptake and are therefore believed to be useful in treating a disorder which is created by or is dependent upon decreased availability of serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine Although the compounds of the formulae (IA-F) inhibit synaptic norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin uptake, in any individual compound these inhibitory effects may be manifested at the same or vastly different concentrations or doses As a result, some compounds of the formulae (IA-F) are useful in treating such a disorder at doses at which synaptic norepinephrine uptake may be substantially inhibited but at which synaptic serotonin uptake or dopamine uptake is not substantially inhibited, or visa versa Also, some compounds of the formulae (IA-F) are useful in treating such a disorder at doses at which synaptic dopamine uptake may be substantially inhibited but at which synaptic norepinephrine or serotonin uptake is not substantially inhibited, or visa versa And, conversely, some compounds of the formulae (IA-F) are useful in treating such a disorder at doses at which synaptic serotonin uptake may be substantially inhibited but at which synaptic norepinephrine or dopamine uptake is not substantially inhibited, or visa versa Other compounds of formulae (IA-F) are useful in treating such a disorder at doses at which synaptic norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin uptake are substantially inhibited
The concentrations or doses at which a test compound inhibits synaptic norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin uptake is readily determined by the use of standard assay and techniques well known and appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art For example, the degree of inhibition at a particular dose in rats can be determined by the method of Dudley, et al , J Pharmacol Exp Ther 217, 834-840 (1981 ), which is incorporated by reference
The therapeutically effective inhibitory dose is one that is effective in substantially inhibiting synaptic norepinephrine uptake, synaptic dopamine uptake, or synaptic serotonin uptake or inhibiting the synaptic uptake of two or more of norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin uptake The therapeutically effective inhibitory dose can be readily determined by those skilled in the art by using conventional range finding techniques and analagous results obtained in the test systems described above.
Compounds of this invention provide a particularly beneficial therapeutic index relative to other compounds available for the treatment of similar disorders. Without intending to be limited by theory, it is believed that this is due, at least in part, to some of the compounds' having higher binding affinities, e.g. their ability to be selective, for the norepinephrine transporter protein ("NET") over the transporters for other neurochemicals, e.g., the dopamine transporter protein ("DAT") and the serotonin transporter protein ("SERT").
Binding affinities are demonstrated by a number of means well known to ordinarily skilled artisans, including, without limitation, those described in the Examples section hereinbelow. Briefly, for example, protein-containing extracts from cells, e.g., HEK293E cells, expressing the transporter proteins are incubated with radiolabelled ligands for the proteins. The binding of the radioligands to the proteins is reversible in the presence of other protein ligands, e.g., the compounds of this invention; said reversability, as described below, provides a means of measuring the compounds' binding affinities for the proteins (Ki). A higher Ki value for a compound is indicative that the compound has less binding affinity for a protein than is so for a compound with a lower Ki; conversely, lower Ki values are indicative of greater binding affinities.
Accordingly, the difference in compound selectivity for proteins is indicated by a lower Ki for the protein for which the compound is more selective, and a higher Ki for the protein for which the compound is less selective. Thus, the higher the ratio in Ki values of a compound for protein A over protein B, the greater is the compounds' selectivity for the latter over the former (the former having a higher Ki and the latter a lower Ki for that compound). Compounds provided herein induce fewer side effects during therapeutic usage because of their selectivity for the norepinephrine transporter protein, as indicated by the ratios of their Ki's for binding to NET over those for binding to other transporter proteins, e.g., DAT and SERT. Generally, some of the compounds of this invention have a Ki ratio for DAT/NET of at least about 2: 1 ; generally also have a SERT/NET ratio of at least about 20: 1.
Moreover, in vivo assessment of the activity of compounds at the NE and DA transporters is, for example, by determining their ability to prevent the sedative effects of tetrabenazine (TBZ) (see, e.g., G. Stille, Arzn. Forsch 14:534-537, 1964. the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference). Randomized and coded doses of test compounds are administered to mice, as is then a dose of tetrabenazine. Animals are then evaluated for antagonism of tetrabenazine-induced exploratory loss and ptosis at specified time intervals after drug administration. Exploratory activity is, for example, evaluated by placing the animal in the center of a circle and then evaluating the amount of time it takes for the animal to intersect the circle's perimeter - generally, the longer it takes for the animal to make this intersection, the greater is its loss of exploratory activity. Furthermore, an animal is considered to have ptosis if its eyelids are at least 50% closed. Greater than 95% of the control (vehicle-treated) mice are expected to exhibit exploratory loss and ptosis; compound-related activity is then calculated as the percentage of mice failing to respond to the tetrabenazine challenge dose, with therapeutically more effective compounds expected to better at reducing loss of exploratory behavior and ptosis. Accordingly, this invention provides methods of treating subjects afflicted with various neurological and psychiatric disorders by administering to said subjects a dose of a pharmaceutical composition provided herein. Said disorders include, without limitation, attention deficit-hyperactivity disorder, anxiety, depression, post-traumatic stress disorder, supranuclear palsy, feeding disorders, obsessive compulsive disorder, analgesia, smoking cessation, panic attacks, Parkinson's and phobia. The compounds provided herein are particularly useful in the treatment of these and other disorders due, at least in part, to their ability to selectively bind to the transporter proteins for certain neurochemicals with a greater affinity than to the transporter proteins for other neurochemicals.
The compounds of the invention, their methods or preparation and their biological activity will appear more clearly from the examination of the following examples which are presented as an illustration only and are not to be considered as limiting the invention in its scope.
Examples The compounds listed in the following Table 1 were made by the processes described above. Specific reaction and processing conditions for the preparation of 2,7-dimethy 1-4-phenyl- 1,2,3,4- tetrahydroisoquinoline (example 1), 2,7-dimethyl-4-(3-fluorophenyl)-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline (example 4), 2,7-dimethyl-4-(4-fluoro-3-methylphenyl)-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline (example 6), 2,7- dimethyl-8-fluoro-4-phenyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline (example 28), 4-(4-chloro-3-fluorophenyl)-2- methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline (example 70), 4-(3,4-difluorophenyl)-2-methyl- 1,2,3,4- tetrahydroisoquinoline (example 78) and 4-(3,5-difluorophenyl)-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline (example 80) are given following the table.
Figure imgf000042_0001
TABLE I:
Ex. R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 Mp (°C)
1 Me H H Me H H H H 245-250J
2 Me H H Me H OMe H H 186-188"
3 Me H H Me H F H H 151-153b
4 Me H H Me F H H H Oil, MSC
5 Me H H Me F F H H 235-240"
6 Me H H Me Me F H H Oil, MSC
7 Me H H Me Cl F H H 243-253a
8 Me H H Me Cl H H H 226-230c
9 Me H H Me H Me H H 257-260J
10 Me H H Me F Me H H 230-230
1 1 Me H H Me H Cl H H 208-210b
12 Me H H Me F Cl H H 240-249°
13 Me H H Me Cl Cl H H 245-246a
14 Me H H Et H H H H 160-162"
15 Me H H Et F F H H 140-141"
Figure imgf000043_0001
IT) LO o LO O LO o LO
(N CN CO CO ^
Figure imgf000044_0001
LO LO o LO O LO o LO o
CN CN CO CO ^ LO
m - Mono Fumarate • 0.25 Hydrate n - Mono Hydrobromide o - Mono Maleate • 0.25 Hydrate p - Mono Hydrochloride • 0.5 Hydrate q - 0.25 Hydrate r - Mono Maleate • 0.25 Hydrate - 0.13 Ethanol s - Mono Sulfate t - Di Hydrochloride • 0.5 Hydrate u - Bis Maleate
Example 1
Preparation of 2,7-dimethyl-4-phenyl-1.2.3.4-tetrahydroisoquinoline
Step A: A solution of m-tolualdehyde (500 mg, 4.16 mmol), -(methylaminomethyl)benzyl alcohol (630 mg, 4.16 mmol) and acetic acid (0.5 ml) was stirred in methanol (16 ml) at 0°C under nitrogen as sodium cyanoborohydride (784 mg, 12.5 mmol) was added in small portions. The reaction mixture was stirred for 5 minutes at 0°C and two days at ambient temperature. The reaction mixture was brought to pH 12 with 2N sodium hydroxide, diluted with water, and extracted with diethyl ether (3X). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, and the solvent removed in vacuo to provide the desired intermediate ( 1.24 g): 1 H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) δ 7.08-7.35 (m, 9H), 4.73-4.77 (m, IH), 3.71 (d, J=13.0 Hz, I H), 3.50 (d, J=13.0 Hz, IH), 2.46-2.67 (m,
2H), 2.36 (s, 3H), 2.32 (s. 3H); Cl MS m/z = 256 [C] 7H2iNO+H]+.
Step B: The product from Step A (1.24 g, 4.90 mmol) was stirred in methylene chloride (208 ml) and treated dropwise with concentrated sulfuric acid (98%, 10 ml) over 3 minutes. After stirring for 20 minutes, the reaction was diluted with ice chips and made basic with 25% aqueous ammonium hydroxide. The reaction mixture was extracted with methylene chloride (3X) and the organic extracts combined, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. Purification by column chromatography, eluting with hexanes / ethyl acetate (5/1 ), afforded the desired tetrahydroisoquinoline (0.23 g): 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) δ 7.17-7.31 ( , 5H), 6.87-6.89 (m, 2H), 6.75 (d, J=7.8 Hz, IH). 4.20-4.26 (m, IH), 3.72 (d, J=14.8 Hz, IH), 3.57 (d, J=14.8 Hz, IH), 2.96-3.10 (m, IH), 2.51-2.58 ( . IH), 2.42 (s, 3H), 2.29 (s, 3H).
Step C: The product from Step B (0.23 g) was treated with ethereal HC1 in methanol (5 ml) to afford a precipitate. The solvents and excess HC1 were removed in vacuo and the resultant solid recrystallized from ethanol / diethyl ether to provide the HC1 salt of the target (0.21 g) as a white solid: mp 245-250°C; 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 6.86-7.40 (m, 7H), 6.74 (d, J=7.8 Hz, IH), 4.52-4.64 (m, 3H), 3.72-3.88 (m, IH), 3.45-3.55 (m, IH), 3.08 (s, 3H), 2.32 (s, 3H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CD3OD) " 130.6, 130.3, 129.1. 127.8. 59.3, 56.8. 44.5, 44.0. 21.1 ; IR (KBr) 2937. 2474, 1454, 701 cm" 1 : Cl MS m z = 238 [C17Hi9N+H]+. Anal. Calcd. for C17H19N-HC1 : C, 74,57; H, 7.36; N. 5.12. Found: C,
74.20; H, 7.34; N, 4.82. Example 4
Preparation of 2.7-dimethvI-4-(3-fluorophenyl)- 1.2.3.4-tetrahydroisoquinoline Step A: m-Tolualdehyde (1.66 g, 14.0 mmol) was treated with methyl amine (40% aqueous,
1.39 ml, 18.0 mmol) in methanol (20 ml) at room temperature. The reaction was stirred 20 minutes and treated with sodium borohydride (0.26 g, 7.0 mmol) portionwise. The reaction was stirred 1 hour and treated with 3'-fluoro-2-bromoacetophenone (3.0 g, 14.0 mmol) followed by stirring for 45 minutes at room temperature. The reaction was finally treated with sodium borohydride (0.52 g, 14.0 mmol) portionwise and stirring continued overnight. The reaction was diluted with water (100 ml) and extracted with methylene chloride (3 X 100 ml). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, followed by filtration and concentration in vacuo. Purification by column chromatography on silica gel eluting with hexanes / ethyl acetate (3/1) provided the amino alcohol (4.3 g) as a yellow oil; JH NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 7.08-7.30 (m, 7H), 4.73 (t, J=6.0 Hz, IH), 3.60 (ABq, JAB=14 0 Hz> 2H)> 2-55 (d> J=8Hz> H)> 2-36 (s» 3H)> 2-31 (s< 3H); CI MS "^ = 274
Figure imgf000046_0001
Step B: The product from Step A (1.0 g, 4.0 mmol) was stirred in methylene chloride (100 ml) and treated dropwise with concentrated sulfuric acid (98%, 7.0 ml) over 3 minutes. After stirring for 1 hour, the reaction was diluted with ice chips and and made basic with 25% aqueous ammonium hydroxide. The reactions mixture was extracted with methylene chloride (3 X 100 ml) and the organic extracts combined, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. Purification by column chromatography, eluting with hexanes / ethyl acetate (3/1), afforded the desired tetrahydroisoquinoline as a yellow oil: 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) δ 6.89-7.00 ( , 5H), 6.75 (d, J=8.0
Hz, IH), 4.21 (t, J=7.0 Hz, IH), 3.64 (ABq, JAB=15-0 Hz> 2HX 3 02 (m> 1 H)> -56 <m ' 1 H>' 2-41 (s> 3H)- 2.29 (s, 3H); CI MS m/z = 256 [C] 7H1 8NF+H]+.
Step C: The product from Step B was subjected to chiral HPLC separation employing a Chiral
Technologies Chiracel® AD column (5 cm X 50 cm) eluting with hexanes / isopropanol (9/1) to afford the (R), [a]2 -16.3 (c=0.498, MeOH) and (S), [α]2^ +16.3 (c=0.476, MeOH) enantiomers in order of elution. The (S)-(+) enantiomer was treated with maleic acid ( 1.0 equilvalent) and the resultant maleate salt filtered and dried to constant weight. (S)-(+)-2,7-dimethyl-4-(3-fluorophenyl)- 1 ,2,3,4- tetrahydroisoquinoline, maleate salt: mp 172-173.5°C. Example 6 Preparation of 2,7-dimethyl-4-(4-fluoro-3-methylphenyD- 1 ,2.3,4-tetrahvdroisoquinoline Step A: -Tolualdehyde (4.0 g, 33.0 mmol) was treated with methyl amine (40% aqueous, 3.36 ml, 43.0 mmol) in methanol (40 ml) at room temperature. The reaction was stirred 20 minutes and treated with sodium borohydride (0.64 g, 33.0 mmol) portionwise. The reaction was stirred 1 hour and treated with 4'-fluoro-3'-methyl-2-bromoacetophenone (7.69 g, 33.0 mmol) followed by stirring for 45 minutes at room temperature. The reaction was finally treated with sodium borohydride (1.0 g, 33 mmol) portionwise and stirring continued overnight. The reaction was diluted with water (100 ml) and extracted with methylene chloride (3 X 100 ml). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, followed by filtration and concentration in vacuo. Purification by column chromatography on silica gel eluting with hexanes / ethyl acetate (2/1) provided the amino alcohol (65.3 g) as a yellow oil; CI MS m/z = 286 [Cι 8H22NFO+H]+.
Step B: The product from Step A (0.52 g, 2.0 mmol) was dissolved in methylene chloride (20 ml) and treated dropwise with concentrated sulfuric acid (98%, 3 ml). The reaction was stirred overnight at room temperature, then diluted with ice chips and and made basic with 25% aqueous ammonium hydroxide. The reaction mixture was extracted with methylene chloride (3 X 50 ml) and the organic extracts combined, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo.
Purification by column chromatography, eluting with hexanes / ethyl acetate (3/1 ) afforded the desired tetrahydroisoquinoline (0.08 g): Η NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) δ 6.87-7.00 (m, 5H), 6.74 (d, J=8.0 Hz,
IH), 4.17 (t, J=7.0 Hz, IH), 3.64 (ABq, JAB=15.0 Hz, 2H), 3.01 (m, IH), 2.53 ( , IH), 2.40 (s, 3H),
2.29 (s, 3H), 2.23 (s, 3H); CI MS /z = 270 [C \ 8H oNF+H]+. Example 28
Preparation of 2,7-dimethyl-8-fluoro-4-phenyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline
Step A: A solution of -(methylaminomethyl)benzyl alcohol (745 mg, 4.9 mmol) and triethylamine (0.79 ml, 5.66 mmol) in acetonitrile (45 ml) at 0°C under nitrogen was treated dropwise with 2-fluoro-3-methylbenzyl bromide ( 1.0 g, 4.9 mmol) as a solution in acetonitrile (25 ml). The reaction was stirred at 0°C for 1 hour and at room temperature for 1.5 hours, followed by dilution with water and extraction with methylene chloride (3X). The combined organic extracts were dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to provide the alkylation product (1.35 g): ]H NMR (CDCI3) δ 7.23 ( , 5H), 7.08-7.17 ( , 2H), 6.97-7.06 (m, IH), 4.71-4.82 (m, IH), 3.79
(d, J=13.1 Hz, IH), 3.62 (d, J=13.2 Hz, I H), 2.33 (s, 3H), 2.29 (s, 3H). Step B : The product from Step A (0.5 g, 1.8 mmol) was treated with sulfuric acid (3.7 ml) and purified by column chromatography as described for Example 1. Step B to afford the desired product
(0.33 g) as an oil: Η NMR (CDCI3) δ 7.06-7.37 (m, 5H). 6.88 (t. J=7.8 Hz, IH), 6.54 (d. J=7.8 Hz, IH), 4.18-4.27 (m, IH), 3.86 (d, J=15.6 Hz, IH), 2.94-3.04 (m, IH), 2.49-2.59 (m, IH), 2.45 (s, 3H), 2.22 (s, 3H).
Step C: The product from Step B (0.33 g, 1.3 mmol) was treated with ethereal HC1 as described in Example 1, Step C to provide the anticipated hydrochloride salt (0.30 g): mp 215-216°C; H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD) δ 7.31-7.44 (m, 2H), 7.21-7.28 (m, 2H), 7.15 (t, J=7.9 Hz, IH), 6.61 (d, J=8.0 Hz,
IH), 4.67-4.78 (m, IH), 4.42-4.62 (m, 2H), 3.77-3.88 (m, IH), 3.55 (t, J=12.0 Hz, IH), 3.1 1 (s, 3H), 2.26
(s, 3H); IR (KBr) 3432, 2954, 2376, 1497, 1457, 1216, 1043, 704 cm" 1 ; CI MS m/z = 256
[C17H18NF+H]+. Anal. Calcd. for C] 7H18NF-HC1: C, 69.98; H, 6.56; N, 4.80. Found: C, 69.64; H,
6.49; N. 4.65. Example 70
Preparation of 4-(4-chloro-3-fluorophenyl)-2-methyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline
Step A: Methylmagnesium bromide was added dropwise over 5 minutes to a stirred solution of
4-chloro-3-fluorobenzaldehyde (10.86 g, 68.5 mmol) in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (100 ml) at -78°C under nitrogen. After stirring for 15 minutes, the cooling bath was removed, and the solution allowed to warm to room temperature. After stirring 3 hours, the solution was poured slowly with stirring into saturated ammonium chloride (100 ml), then diluted with water (50 ml) and extracted with diethyl ether. The organic extracts were washed with water and saturated sodium chloride, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and the solvent removed in vacuo to provide the benzylic alcohol (1 1.89 g) as a clear, yellow oil: 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) δ 7.35 (t, J=7.8 Hz, IH), 7.18 (dd, J=2.0, 10.0 Hz, IH), 7.07 (dd, J=1.7, 8.1 Hz. IH), 4.83-4.92 (m, I H). 2.01 (d, J=3.6 Hz, I H). 1.47 (d, J=6.3 Hz, 3H), CI MS m/z = 175 [C8H8C1F0+H]+
Step B: The product from Step A (9.0 g, 52.0 mmol) in anyhdrous methylene chloride (60 ml) under nitrogen was added by cannula to a stirred suspension of pyridinium chlorochromate ( 16.7 g, 77.0 mmol) and diatomaceous earth ( 15 g) in anhydrous methylene chloride ( 150 ml) at 0°C under nitrogen. After stirring for 26 hours, the heterogeneous mixture was diluted with diethyl ether (300 ml), stirred for 1 hour, and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and the volatile product purified by column chromatography on silica gel (60 g) eluting with hexanes / ethyl acetate (9/1 ) to provide the desired acetophenone in quantitative crude yield: ]H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) δ 7.65-7.75 (m, 2H), 7.51 (t,
J=7.6 Hz, IH). 2.60 (s. 3H), CI MS m/z = 173 [C8H6ClFO+H]+. Step C: The product from Step B (52 mmol) was treated with tetrabutylammonium tribromide
(25.5 g, 52.9 mmol) in methanol / methylene chloride (1/3, 240 ml) under nitrogen. After stirring 3 days at room temperature, the solvents were removed in vacuo. and the residue dissolved in diethyl ether (200 ml), washed with water (4 X 50 ml), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Purification by column chromatography on silica gel ( 120 g) eluting with hexanes / ethyl acetate (30/1) afforded the desired -bromoacetophenone (6.23 g) as a crystalline solid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 7.70-7.81 (m, 2H), 7.55 (t, J=7.7 Hz, IH), 4.39 (s, 2H); CI MS m/z = 251
[C8H5BrClFO+H]+. Step D: Methylamine (40 wt% aqueous, 18.0 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of benzaldehyde (1.8 g, 17 mmol) in methanol (20 ml) under nitrogen. After stirring 10 minutes at room temperature, the solution was cooled to 0°C and treated with sodium borohydride (0.32 g, 8.5 mmol) portionwise. The reaction was stirred for 15 minutes, warmed to room temperature and stirred an additional 1 hour, whereupon the product from Step C (4.3 g, 17 mmol) was added. The reaction was stirred 1 hour, cooled to 0°C and treated again with sodium borohydride (0.32 g, 8.5 mmol) and allowed to stir overnight with warming to room temperature. The solution was diluted with water (100 ml) and extracted with methylene chloride (3 X 50 ml). The organic extracts were dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to provide the desired product as a clear yellow oil (1.77 g):
]H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) δ 7.25-7.39 (m, 6H), 7.17 (dd, J=1.8, 10.0 Hz, IH), 7.04 (d, J=8.3 Hz, IH), 4.69 (dd, J=5.8, 8.2 Hz, IH), 3.74 (d, J=13.0 Hz, IH), 3.52 (d, J=13.0 Hz, IH), 2.45-2.57 (m, 2H), 2.32
(s, 3H), CI MS m/z = 294 [C16H] 7ClFNO+H]+.
Step E: The product from Step D (1.77 g, 6.0 mmol) was stirred in concentrated sulfuric acid
(4.0 ml) and methylene chloride (40 ml) for 15 minutes at room temperature. The reaction was poured on ice, made alkaline with concentrated ammonium hydroxide, and extracted with diethyl ether. The combined ether extracts were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford the crude product as a cloudy yellow oil (1.7 g): 1H NMR (300 MHz. CDCI3) δ 7.30 (t, J=7.9 Hz, IH),
7.06-7.22 (m, 3H), 6.92-7.03 (m, 2H), 6.85 (d, J=7.4 Hz, IH), 4.28 (t, J=6.7 Hz, IH), 3.77 (d, J=15.1 Hz, lH), 3.70 (d, J=15.1 Hz, IH), 3.05 (dd, J=5.6, 1 1.9 Hz, IH), 2.62 (dd, J=8.0, 1 1.5 Hz, IH), 2.46 (s, 3H). Step F: The product from Step E (1.7 g, 6.0 mmol) was treated with ethereal HCl (1.0 M, 12.0 ml, 12.0 mmol) in methanol (20 ml) to afford a precipitate. The solvents and excess HCl were removed in vacuo and the resultant solid recrystallized from methanol / diethyl ether to provide the HCl salt of the target (1.1 g) as a white solid: mp 230-235°C; !H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.51 (t, J=8.0 Hz, IH), 7.26-7.39
(m, 3H), 7.18 (dd, J=2.0, 10.2 Hz, IH), 7.1 1 (dd. J=1.8, 8.3 Hz, I H), 6.92 (d, J=7.9 Hz, lH), 4.68 (dd. J=6.3, 11.3 Hz, IH). 4.59 (bs. 2H), 3.87 (dd, J=6.2, 12.4 Hz, IH). 3.56 (t, J=l 1.8 Hz, IH), 3.08 (s, 3H); IR (Kbr) 3448, 2928. 2365. 1491 , 1060, 747 cm" 1 ; CI MS m/z = 276 [C] 65NClF+H]+; Anal. Calcd. for Cι6H15NClF-HCl: C, 61.55; H, 5.17; N, 4.49. Found: C, 61.20; H, 5.07; N, 4.32. Step G: The product from Step E was subjected to chiral HPLC separation employing a Chiral
Technologies Chiracel® OD column (2 cm X 20 cm) eluting with hexanes / isopropanol (9/1) to afford the (S) and (R) enantiomers in order of elution. Each enantiomer was treated with maleic acid (1.0 equilvalent) and the resultant maleate salts filtered and dried to constant weight. (S)-(+)-4-(4-chloro-3-
25 fluorophenyl)-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline, maleate salt: mp 171-172°C; [α] p +16.0
(c=0.200, MeOH).(R)-(-)-4-(4-chloro-3-fluorophenyl)-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline, maleate salt: mp 171-172°C; [α]2 j -15.5 (c=0.200, MeOH).
Example 78
Preparation of 4-f 3,4-difluorophenyl)-2-methyl- 1.2.3,4-tetrahvdroisoquinoline Step A: 3,4-Difluoroacetophenone (25.0 g, 160.0 mmol) was treated with acetic acid (250 ml) and bromine (8.23 ml, 160.0 mmol, solution in 13 ml acetic acid) at room temperature under nitrogen.
The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour and concentrated in vacuo to remove acetic acid.
The residue was suspended in saturated sodium carbonate and extracted with methylene chloride several times. The combined organic extracts were dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford the desired bromoacetophenone derivative (37.0 g) as a yellow crystalline solid: ]H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 7.81 (m, 2H), 7.32 (m, IH), 4.39 (s, 2H).
Step B: The product from Step A (37.0 g, 158.0 mmol) was dissolved in methylene chloride (290 ml) and added dropwise to a solution of N-benzyl-N-methylamine (20.3 ml, 158.0 mmol) and triethylamine (22.0 ml, 158.0 mmol) in methylene chloride (312 ml). The addition was carried out over 45 minutes at 0°C, warmed to room temperature and allowed to stir an additional 4 hours. The reaction was diluted with water (300 ml) and extracted with methylene chloride. The combined organic extracts were dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The product was purifed by column chromatography on silica gel (600 g) eluting with hexanes / ethyl acetate (7/3) to afford the desired alkylation product as a clear, light brown oil (30.2 g): Η NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) δ 7.87-7.73 ( , 2H), 7.35-7.15 (m, 6H), 3.68 (s, 2H), 3.64 (s, 2H), 2.34 (s, 3H).
Step C: The product from Step B (15.0 g, 54.0 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (65 ml), chilled in an ice bath and treated with sodium borohydride (1.38 g, 36.0 mmol). The reaction was stirred at 0°C for 1 hour and at room temperature for 1 hour, followed by quenching with water and extraction with methylene chloride. The combined organic extracts were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to directly provide the pure benzylic alcohol ( 14.4 g) as a yellow oil: Η NMR
(300 MHz, CDCI3) δ 7.38-7.00 (m, 8H), 4.67 (t, J=7.0 Hz, IH), 3.74 and 3.35 (ABq, JAB=13.2 Hz, 2H),
2.50 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 2H), 2.31 (s, 3H). Anal. Calcd. for Cι 6H] 7N] 0]F2: C, 69.30; H. 6.19; N, 5.05. Found: C, 68.94; H. 6.21 ; N, 4.94. Step D: The product from Step C (14.4 g, 52.0 mmol) was stirred in concentrated sulfuric acid (27.0 ml) and methylene chloride (333 ml) for 15 minutes at room temperature. The reaction was poured on ice, made alkaline with concentrated ammonium hydroxide, and extracted with diethyl ether. The combined ether extracts were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel eluting with hexanes / ethyl acetate (1/1) to provide the pure tetrahydroisoquinoline (1 1.4 g): 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) δ 7.29-7.36 (m, IH),
6.83-7.20 (m, 6H), 4.20 (t, J=6.3 Hz. IH), 3.66 (s, 2H), 2.95 (dd, J=5.4, 1 1.5 Hz, IH), 2.58 (dd, J=7.4, 1 1.3 Hz, 1H), 2.41 (s, 3H).
Step E: The product from Step D (0.8 g, 3.0 mmol) was treated with ethereal HCl as described in Example 1 , Step F to provide the anticipated hydrochloride salt (0.6 g): mp 200°C (sublimed); 'H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD) δ 7.24-7.39 (m, 4H), 7.14-7.23 ( , IH), 7.06-7.13 (m, IH), 6.92 (d, J=7.8
Hz, lH), 4.65 (dd, J=6.1 , 1 1.4 Hz), 4.58 (s, 2H), 3.85 (dd, J=6.2, 12.4 Hz, IH), 3.54 (t, J=l 1.8 Hz, IH),
3.07 (s, 3H); IR (KBr) 3448, 2932, 2549, 1512, 1465, 1276, 742 cm"ø CI MS m/z = 260 [C]6Hι5NF2+H]+. Anal. Calcd. for C16H15NF -HCl-0.25 H20: C, 64.00, H, 5.54; N, 4.66. Found: C, 64.1 1 ; H, 5.30; N, 4.62.
Step F: The product from Step D was subjected to chiral HPLC separation employing a Chiral
Technologies Chiracel® OD column (2 cm X 20 cm) eluting with hexanes / isopropanol (9/1 ) to afford the (S) and (R) enantiomers in order of elution. Each enantiomer was treated with maleic acid (1.0 equilvalent) and the resultant maleate salts filtered and dried to constant weight. (S)-(-)-4-(3,4- difluorophenyl)-2-methyl-l ,2.3.4-tetrahydroisoquinoline, maleate salt: mp 138-139°C; [α] 2 f5 -2.6
(c=0.366, MeOH). (R)-(+)-4-(3.4-difluorophenyl)-2-methyl-l ,2,3.4-tetrahydroisoquinoline, maleate salt:
138-139°C; [ ]2^ +2.5 (c=0.386, MeOH).
Example 80
Preparation of 4-(3.5-difluorophenyl)-2-methyl- 1.2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline Step A: Tetrabutylammonium tribromide (18.6 g. 38.6 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of
3,5-difluoroacetophenone (6.0 g, 38.6 mmol) in methanol / methylene chloride (1/3, 180 ml) under nitrogen. After stirring at room temperature for 72 hours, the solvents were removed in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in diethyl ether (200 ml), washed with water (4 X 50 ml), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and the solvent removed in vacuo to give a mixture of the α-bromoacetophenone and the corresponding dimethyl ketal (9.0 g): ]H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) δ 7.50 (dd, J=2.0, 4.0 Hz,
2H), 7.08 (m, IH), 4.39 (s, 2H).
Step B: To the product mixture from Step A (3.5 g, 14.7 mmol) and N-methyl-N-benzylamine (1.8 g, 14.7 mmol) in methylene chloride ( 15 ml) was added diisopropyl ethyl amine (3.0 ml. 17 mmol). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 5.5 hours, then washed with water and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. After filtration and concentration in vacuo, the material was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (140 g) eluting with hexanes / ethyl acetate / triethylamine
(9/1/0.1) to provide the desired alkylation product (1.2g) as an orange oil: ]H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) δ 7.48 (dd, J=2.0, 4.0 Hz, 2H), 7.33 (m, 5H), 7.00 ( , IH), 3.69 (s, 2H), 3.66 (s, 2H), 2.36 (s, 3H).
Step C: The product from Step B (1.1 g, 4.0 mmol) was dissolved in methanol, chilled in an ice bath and treated with sodium borohydride (0.1 g, 2.7 mmol). The reaction was stirred at 0°C for 1 hour and at room temperature for 1 hour, followed by quenching with water and extraction with methylene chloride. The combined organic extracts were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to provide the benzylic alcohol (0.8 g) as an orange oil: ]H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) δ 7.40-7.30
(m, 5H), 6.90-6.82 (m, IH), 6.70-6.60 (m, IH), 4.70 (m, IH), 3.73 (d, J=14.0 Hz, IH), 3.52 (d, J=14.0 Hz, IH), 2.55-2.40 (m, 2H), 2.29 (s, 3H).
Step D: The product from Step C (0.4 g, 1.4 mmol) was stirred in concentrated sulfuric acid (1.5 ml) and methylene chloride ( 10 ml) for 15 minutes at room temperature. The reaction was poured on ice, made alkaline with concentrated ammonium hydroxide, and extracted with diethyl ether. The combined ether extracts were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Purification by column chromatography on silica gel (15 g) eluting with hexanes / ethyl acetate / triethylamine
(9/1/0.1) afforded the target (70 mg): ] H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) δ 7.40-7.07 (m, 4H), 6.87 (d, J=7.0
Hz, IH), 6.77-6.62 (m, 2H), 4.21 (t, J=6.0 Hz, IH). 3.66 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 2H), 2.95 (dd, J=5.0, 6.0 Hz, IH), 2.61 (dd, J=6.0 Hz, 7.0 Hz, I H). 2.41 (s, 3H).
Step E: The product from Step D (70 mg, 0.27 mmol) was treated with ethereal HCl ( 1.0 M. 0.6 ml, 0.6 mmol) in methanol ( 1.4 ml) to afford a precipitate. The solvents and excess HCl were removed in vacuo and the resultant solid recrystallized from methanol / diethyl ether to provide the HCl salt of the target (53 mg) as a white solid: mp 230-233°C; ] H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD) δ 7.36-7.28 (m, 3H), 6.99-6.90 (m, 4H), 4.67 (dd. J=6.0. 6.0 Hz, IH), 4.58 (bs, IH), 3.87 (dd, J=6.0, 6.0 Hz, IH), 3.57 (m.
IH), 3.08 (s, 3H); IR (KBr) 2931 , 2473, 1625. 1598, 1462, 1 1 19 cm- 1 : CI MS m/z = 260
[C]6H ι 5F2N+H]+; Anal. Calcd. for C] 6Hi 5F2N-HCl-0.1H20: C, 64.58; H, 5.49; N, 4.71. Found: C,
64.45; H, 5.43; N, 4.49. Example 85 Preparation of (3,5-difluoro)-4-phenyl-l ,2,7-trimethyl-l ,2.3.4-tetrahvdroisoquinoline
Step A: Nitromethane ( 1.6 L, 30 mmol) was added dropwise to an ice-cold solution of tetrabutylammonium fluoride (7.5 mmol) in dry THF (20 mL). A solution of 3,5-difluorobenzaldehyde (2.85 g, 20.1 mmol ) in dry THF (5 L) was added dropwise. Triethylamine (2.8 mL, 20 mmol) was then added dropwise. A solution of terf-butyldimethylsilyl chloride (4.54 g, 30.1 mmol) in dry THF (15 mL) was added dropwise, causing a white precipitate to form. The reaction was stirred at 0 °C for 30 min and then was filtered. The solid was washed with ether/hexanes. The filtrate was washed (2 x) with water. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure leaving a yellow oil. The yellow oil was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (300 g) eluting with 30% EtOAc/hexanes to give compound the product (2.65 g, 65%) as a colorless oil: Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC1,) δ 6.98-6.95 (m, 2H), 6.80 (tt, J = 8.8, 2.3 Hz, IH), 5.49-5.44 (m, IH), 4.56-4.53 (m, 2H), 3.00 (d, J = 2.9 Hz, IH).
Step B : A slurry of the product from Step A (2.35 g, 1 1.6 mmol) and platinum oxide (0.20 g) in absolute ethanol (20 mL) was hydrogenated at 40 psig for 4 h. The reaction was filtered throgh a plug of Celite, which was washed with additional absolute ethanol. The solvent was removed in vacuo leaving the amine product (1.97 g, 98%) as a white solid: mp 54-58 °C; Η NMR (300 MHz, CD,OD) δ 7.01- 6.98 (m, 2H), 6.87-6.81 (m, IH), 4.70 (dd, J = 8.2, 3.8 Hz, IH), 2.90 (dd, J = 13.0, 3.8 Hz, IH), 2.76 {dd, J = 13.0, 8.2 Hz, IH). Step C: A solution of 3-methylacetophenone (1.36 g, 10.1 mmol) and the product from Step B
( 1.75 g, 10.1 mmol) in toluene (20 mL) was heated at reflux with azeotropic removal of water for 4 h under nitrogen. The toluene was removed in vacuo leaving an orange oil. To an ice-cold solution of the orange oil in methanol (10 mL), was added NaBH4 (0.44 g, 12 mmol). The reaction was stirred for 1 h at 0 °C and then slowly allowed to warm to room temperature over 4 h. The reaction was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was taken up in water and extracted (3 x) with ether. The combined organic extracts were dried over Na,S04, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give the product as a mixture of diastereomers (3.00 g, > 100%) as a yellow oil: Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC1,) δ 7.22-7.18 (m, 2H), 7.08-7.06 (m, 2H), 6.91 -6.81 (m, 2H), 6.70-6.64 (m, I H), 4.69-4.45 (m, IH), 3.81 - 3.67 (m, IH), 2.83-2.75 (m, IH), 2.58-2.40 (m. IH). 2.34 (s. 3H), 1.39-1.36 (m, 3H). Step D: Concentrated H,S04 (12.0 mL) was added to a stirred, ice-cold solution of the crude product from Step C (3.00 g, 10.3 mmol) in CH2C12 (105 mL). After stirring 15 min, the mixture was poured onto ice, made strongly alkaline with excess cone. NH4OH, and extracted (2 x) with Et,0. The combined organic extracts were dried over Na,S04, filtered, and the solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue (1.75 g) was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (145 g) eluting with 10% EtOAc/hexanes containing 1 % Et,N and then 20% EtOAc/hexanes containing 1 % Et,N to afford the product, a mixture of diastereomers, (426 mg, 15%) as a yellow oil: Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC1,) δ 7.04- 6.61 ( , 6H), 4.22-3.99 (m, 2H), 3.49-3.29 (m, IH), 3.19-2.92 (m, IH), 2.34-2.32 (m, 3H), 1.52- 1.47 ( , 3H).
Step E: Formaldehyde (37 wt%, 0.70 mL, 9.4 mmol) was added to a solution of the product from Step D (426 mg, 1.56 mmol) in methanol ( 16 mL). After 1.5 h, Raney nickel (0.51 g) was added. and the reaction was hydrogenated at 35 psig for 21 h. The reaction was filtered through a pad of Celite, which was washed with methanol. The filtrate was evaporated in vacuo, leaving a milky liquid, which was extracted with ether. The ether extract was dried over Na2S04, filtered, and the solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue (392 mg) was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (150 g) eluting with 10% EtOAc/hexanes containing 1 % Et,N to give the desired compound (82 mg, 18%) as a colorless oil.: 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDC1,) δ 6.97 (s, IH), 6.92 (d, J = 7.7 Hz, IH), 6.78-6.61 ( , 4H), 4.1 1 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, IH), 3.65 (q, J = 6.6 Hz, IH), 3.04-2.86 (m, 2H), 2.45 (s, 3H), 2.32 (s, 3H), 1.45 (d, J = 6.6 Hz, 3H).
Step F : A 1 M HCl solution in ether (1.0 mL, 1.0 mmol) was added dropwise to a stirred solution of of the product from Step E (82 mg, 0.28 mmol) in methanol (3 mL). After 30 min, the solvents and excess HCl were removed in vacuo. and the residue precipitated from ether and sonicated for 30 min. The off-white solid was isolated by filtration and then dried at room temperature under vacuum for 24 h to give the product (78 mg, 83%) as an off-white solid: mp 194-197 °C (with decomposition); Η NMR (300 MHz, CD D) δ 7.14-7.12 (m, 2H), 7.00-6.81 (m, 4H), 4.65-4.59 (m, 2H), 3.66-3.64 (m, 2H), 3.03 (s, 3H), 2.35 (s, 3H), 1.75 (d, J = 6.5 Hz, 3H); IR (KBr) 2928, 2480, 1624, 1599, 1464, 1 1 19, 975, 859 cm"1; CI MS m/z = 288 [C18HI9F2N+H]+; HPLC >99%, tr = 16.96 min; Anal. Calcd. for C18H,,F,N-HC1-0.25H,O: C, 65.85; H, 6.29; N, 4.27. Found: C, 65.98; H, 6.12; N, 4.16. Example 89 Preparation of (8-fluoro-2-methyl-4-phenyl- 1.2.3.4-tetrahydro-7-isoquinolinyl)-N-methylmethanamine Step A: Methylamine (15.3 mL, 40% aq. solution, 177 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of
3-fluorobenzaldehyde (20.0 g, 161 mmol) in MeOH (150 mL) at room temperature. After stirring for 6 h, the reaction was cooled to 0 °C and then NaBH4 (6.10 g, 161 mmol) was added portionwise. The cooling bath was removed and the reaction was warmed to room temperature and stirred for 16.5 h. The reaction was quenched with HX), and cautiously acidified with 2 N HCl, and then extracted (3 x) with CH,C1,. The aq. phase was then basified using 6 N NaOH and then extracted (4 x) with CH2C12. The latter organic extracts were combined, dried over Na„S04, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to afford the product (21.51 g. 96%), as a clear oil: Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC1,) δ 7.32 (td, J = 7.5, 1.7 Hz, I H), 7.28-7.19 (m, IH), 7.14-6.98 (m, 2H). 3.80 (s, 2H), 2.45 (s. 3H), 1.47 (br s, IH).
Step B: Triethylamine (8.40 mL, 60.0 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of the product from Step A (8.35 g, 60.0 mmol) and phenacyl bromide ( 1 1.94 g, 60.0 mmol) in CH:C12 (200 L) at room temperature under N„. After stirring for 18 h, the reaction was quenched with a mixture 10: 1 mixture of H20/6 N NaOH (33 mL) and organic layer was dried over Na,S04, filtered, and the solvent evaporated in vacuo, affording crude product (17.08 g, theoretical = 15.44 g), as a yellow oil: Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC1,) δ 8.00-7.94 (m, 2H). 7.59-7.52 (m, IH), 7.48-7.37 (m, 3H), 7.30-7.21 ( , IH), 7.15-7.10 (m, 2H). 3.85 (s. 2H). 3.79 (s. 2H). 2.39 (s, 3H); IR (CH2C1 solution) 3055, 2925, 2850, 1682. 1598, 1490. 1450, 1266, 1225, 738, 703 cm'1; CI MS m/z = 258 [C,6H,6FNO+H]+. This material was used without further manipulation.
Step C: Sodium borohydride (4.54 g, 120 mmol) was added portionwise to a stirred solution of the product from Step B (17.1 g, -60.0 mmol) in MeOH (150 mL), cooled to 0 °C under N2. After stirring for 4.5 h at room temperature, the reaction was diluted with H20 (300 mL) and extracted (4 x) with CH2C12. The organic extracts were combined, washed with sat. NaCl, dried over Na2S04, filtered, and the solvent evaporated in vacuo. Chromatography of the residual yellow oil (15.81 g) using silica (200 g) and elution with 50% EtOAc/hexanes afforded the product (14.81 g, 95% over 2 steps), as a yellow oil: Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC0) δ 7.39-7.22 (m, 7H), 7.15-7.01 (m, 2H), 4.75 (dd, J = 8.3, 5.6 Hz, IH), 3.79 (d, J = 13.3 Hz, IH), 3.64 (d, J = 13.3 Hz, IH), 2.65-2.53 (m, 2H), 2.33 (s, 3H); IR (CH2C12 solution) 3062, 2849, 1587, 1491 , 1455, 1333, 1266, 1228, 1094, 1062, 1023, 897, 877, 758, 738, 701 cm"1; CI MS m/z = 260 [C16HlfcFNO+H]+.
Step D: Cone, sulfuric acid (24 mL) was added dropwise to a stirred solution of the product from Step C (14.8 g, 57.1 mmol) in CH,C12 (280 mL), cooled to 0 °C, using an ice-water bath. The cooling bath was removed after addition was complete and the reaction was vigorously stirred at room temperature for 20 min. The reaction was then poured into an ice / water mixture (400 mL) and the resultant mixture basified with cone. NH OH solution to pH ~ 10. The aq. layer was extracted (3 x) with CH2C1 The organic extracts were combined, washed with a 2: 1 mixture of sat. NaCl/1 N NaOH, dried over Na,S04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Chromatography of the residue (13.91 g) on silica (450 g) and elution with 33% EtOAc/hexanes afforded the product (12.66 g, 92%), as a yellow oil: Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC1,) δ 7.33-7.15 (m, 5H), 7.08-6.98 (m, 1 H), 6.90-6.82 (m, 1 H), 6.66 (d, J = 1.1 Hz, 1 H), 4.30-4.22 (m. IH), 3.86 (d, J = 15.6 Hz, I H), 3.53 (d, J = 15.6 Hz, IH), 3.02 (dd, J = 1 1.4, 5.6, 1.1 Hz, IH), 2.57 (dd, J = 1 1.6, 8.7 Hz, IH), 2.47 (s, 3H); IR (CH2C12 solution) 2941 , 2782, 1583, 1494, 1468, 1457, 1378, 1248, 1 139, 1040, 887, 792, 764, 736, 701 cm '; CI MS m/z = 242 [CI6H1(jFN+H]+. Step E: r-Butyl lithium (30 mL, 1.7 M in pentane, 50.5 mmol) was added dropwise to a stirred solution of the product from Step D (5.50 g, 22.8 mmol) and TMEDA (7.6 mL, 50.2 mmol) in Et20 (120 mL) cooled to -60 °C under N,. After stirring for 45 min, DMF (7.0 mL, 91.2 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at -60 °C for 1.5 h. The reaction was quenched with MeOH (10 mL), warmed to room temperature, and then diluted with H,0 (200 mL) and the aqueous layer was extracted (4 x) with CHηCl2. The combined CH,C1, extract was dried over Na„S0 , filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Chromatography of the residue (9.05 g) on silica (350 g) and elution with 33% EtOAc/hexanes afforded the product (1.21 g. 20%), as a brown oil: Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC1,) δ 10.32 (s, IH), 7.56 (t, J = 7.6 Hz, IH), 7.34-7.21 (m, 3H), 7.19-7.10 (m, 2H), 6.79 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, IH), 4.31-4.23 (m, IH), 3.90 (d, .7 = 15.8 Hz, IH), 3.58 (d. J = 15.8 Hz, IH). 3.04 (dd, J = 1 1.9, 5.6, 1.0 Hz, IH), 2.61 (dd, 7 = 1 1.7, 8.3 Hz, 1 H), 2.49 (s, 3H); CI MS m/z = 270 [CI7H]fFNO+H]i Step F: Methylamine (0.05 mL, 40% aq. solution, 0.62mmol) was added to a stirred solution of impure aldehyde 147 (0.15 g, -0.57 mmol) in MeOH (3 mL) at room temperature. After stirring for 6 h, the reaction was cooled to 0 °C and then NaBH4 (0.022 g, 0.57 mmol) was added. The cooling bath was removed and the reaction was warmed to room temperature and stirred for 18 h. The reaction was quenched with H20 extracted (4 x) with CH,C12. The organic extracts were combined, dried over Na2S04, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. Chromatography of the residue (0.18 g) using silica (10 g) and elution with 88:12: 1 CHCl^MeOH onc. NH4OH afforded methylamine 147 (0.10 g), as a brown oil: Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC1 ) δ 7.32-7.12 (m, 5H), 7.02 (t, J = 7.8 Hz, IH), 6.63 (d, J = 7.9 Hz, IH), 4.28-
4.20 (m, IH), 3.86 (d, J = 15.6 Hz, IH), 3.75 (s, 2H), 3.52 (d, J = 15.6 Hz, IH), 3.00 (dd, J = 1 1.3, 5.6, 0.9 Hz, IH), 2.55 (dd, J = 1 1.5, 8.7 Hz, IH), 2.46 (s, 3H), 2.43 (s, 3H); CI MS m/z = 285
[C18H21FN2+H]\
Step G: An ethereal HCl solution (1.80 mL, 1 N, 1.80 mmol) was added to a solution of the product from Step F (0.10 g, 0.35 mmol) in MeOH (0.5 mL) and Et20 (5 mL) at room temperature, resulting in the formation of a off-white solid. The solid was isolated and then recrystallized from MeOH/Et20 (3x) and the solid was dried in vacuo (54 °C) to afford the salt (0.083 g, 66%) as a light green solid: mp 185-205 °C; Η NMR (300 MHz, CD,OD) δ 7.50-7.24 (m, 6H), 6.86-6.78 (m, IH), 4.80- 4.50 (m, 3H), 4.29 (s, 2H), 3.92-3.83 ( , IH), 3.70-3.55 (m, IH), 3.15 (s, 3H), 2.76 (s, 3H); IR (KBr) 3422, 2956. 2698, 1635, 1497, 1456, 1218, 1032, 895, 770, 703, 560 cm '; CI MS m/z = 285 [C,8H2IFN2+H]+; HPLC 95.5%, tr = 10.96 min; Anal. Calcd. for C,8H2]FN2-2HC1.0.5H2O: C, 59.02; H, 6.60; N, 7.65. Found: C, 59.13; H, 6.73; N, 7.42. Example 90 Preparation of (2-methyl-4-phenyl-7-isoquinolinyl)-N-methylmethanamine
Step A: Methylamine (40 wt% aqueous, 2.6 mL. 30 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of 3- bromobenzaldehyde (5.44 g, 29.4 mmol) in MeOH (30 mL) under N,. After stirring 1 h, the colorless solution was cooled to 0 °C and then NaBH (0.60 g, 16 mmol) was added portionwise. After stirring 1 h, the cooling bath was removed. After stirring for 90 min, the reaction was cooled to 0 °C and then phenacyl bromide (5.90 g, 29.6 mmol) was added portionwise over 30 min. The reaction was allowed to warm to room temperature. After stirring for 2 h at room temperature, the solution was cooled to 0 °C and then NaBH4 ( 1.20 g, 31.7 mmol) was added portionwise over 10 min. The solution was stirred for 24 h. during which time the temperature rose from 0 ° to 25 °C. The solution was diluted with H,0 (400 mL), extracted (4 x) with ether. The ether extracts were dried over Na,S04, filtered, and the solvent removed in vacuo to give the product (9.21 g. 98%) as a yellow oil: Η NMR (300 MHz, CDCL) δ 7.47-
7.21 (m, 9H), 4.77 (dd, J = 10.0, 4.0 Hz, IH), 3.71 (d, i = 13.3 Hz, IH), 3.51 (d, J = 13.3 Hz, IH), 2.61- 2.49 ( , 2H), 2.32 (s, 3H). Step B: Cone. H2S0 (40.0 mL) was added dropwise over 15 min to a stirred solution of the product from Step A (9.18 g, 28.7 mmol) in CH,C12 (300 mL). After stirring 45 min, the mixture was poured onto ice, made strongly alkaline with excess cone. NH4OH, extracted (3 x) with Et20. The ether extracts were dried over Na,S04, filtered, the solvent was removed in vacuo, and the residue (7.29 g) was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (300 g) eluting with 10% EtOAc/hexanes containing 1 % Et,N the product (2.05 g, 24%) as an orange oil: Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC1,) δ 7.32-7.27 (m, 4H), 7.25-7.14 (m, 3H), 6.74 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, IH), 4.22-4.17 (m, IH), 3.71 (d, J = 15.1 Hz, IH), 3.57 (d, J = 15.1 Hz, IH), 3.05-2.99 (m, IH), 2.54 (dd, J = 1 1.5, 8.7 Hz, IH), 2.42 (s, 3H).
Step C: A slurry of bromide the product from Step B (1.15 g, 3.81 mmol), zinc cyanide (271 mg, 2.31 mmol) , and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (266 mg, 0.230 mmol) in dry DMF (5 mL) was heated at 83 °C for 24 h. After allowing the reaction to cool to room temperature, the reaction was diluted with toluene and washed with 2 N NaOH. The toluene extract was dried over Na,S04, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue (1.20 g) was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (95 g) eluting with 20% EtOAc/hexanes containing 1 % Et,N to give the product (673 mg, 71 %) as a yellow solid: mp 103- 104 °C; Η NMR (500 MHz, CDC0) δ 7.38 (s, IH), 7.34-7.23 (m, 4H), 7.16-7.14 (m, 2H), 6.98 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, IH), 4.27 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, IH), 3.75 (d, J = 15.2 Hz, IH), 3.61 (d, J = 15.2 Hz, IH), 3.07-3.03 (m, IH), 2.59 (dd, 7 = 1 1.7, 8.4 Hz, IH), 2.44 (s, 3H); CI MS m/z = 249 [C,7H,6N2+HJ0
Step D: A solution of the product from Step C (201 mg, 0.809 mmol) in dry THF (4 mL) was added dropwise to an ice-cold slurry of lithium aluminum hydride (61 mg, 1.6 mmol) in dry THF (2 mL). The reaction was stirred for 90 min with cooling and then was allowed to warm to room temperature. The reaction was stirred for 5 h and then was quenched with EtOAc and then a saturated Na,S04 solution. The reaction was diluted with ether, dried over solid Na,S04, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (26 g) eluting with 12% methanol/chloroform containing 1 % cone. NH4OH to give the product (134 mg, 66%) as a colorless oil: Η NMR (300 MHz. CDCL,) δ 7.31-7.18 (m, 5H), 7.04 (s, I H), 7.00 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, IH), 6.83 (d. J = 8.0 Hz, IH), 4.25 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, IH), 3.81 (s, 2H), 3.75 (d, J = 14.9 Hz, IH), 3.60 (d, J = 14.9 Hz, IH), 3.06- 3.00 (m, IH), 2.56 (dd, J = 1 1.4. 8.7 Hz, IH), 2.43 (s, 3H).
Step E: A slurry of the product from Step D (53 mg. 0.21 mmol) and maleic acid (25 mg, 0.22 mmol) in absolute EtOH (10 mL) was heated in a 40 °C water bath until all of the solid had dissolved. After 1 h, the reaction was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was recrystallized from ethanol/ether producing the bis maleate salt (43 mg, 42%) as a green solid: mp 176-177 °C (with decomposition); Η NMR (300 MHz. CD.OD) δ 7.40-7.30 (m, 5H), 7.22 (dd, J = 8.0, 1.3 Hz, 2H), 6.97 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 6.24 (s, 4H), 4.58 (dd, J = 1 1.3, 6.1 Hz, IH), 4.52 (s, 2H). 4.12 (s, 2H), 3.78 (dd, J = 12.3, 6.2 Hz, IH), 3.45 (t, J = 11.8 Hz, IH), 3.02 (s, 3H); HPLC 95.8%, tr = 10.81 min; Anal. Calcd. for C17H20N,- 2(C4H404): C, 61.98; H, 5.82; N, 5.78. Found: C, 61.86; H, 5.82; N, 5.60. Example 91
Preparation of N-methyl(2-methyl-4-phenyl-7-isoquinolinyl)-N-methylmethanamine Step A: A 1 M HCl solution in ether (3.0 mL, 3.0 mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of the product from Step C, Example 90 (82 mg, 0.32 mmol) in methanol (6 mL). The solvents and excess HCl were removed in vacuo leaving a green solid. A slurry of this green solid, potassium carbonate (199 mg, 1.44 mmol), and ethyl chloroformate (0.20 mL, 2.1 mmol) in methanol (1 mL) and acetone (6 mL) was heated at 50 °C for 20 h. After allowing the reaction to cool to room temperature, the reaction was diluted with brine and extracted (4 x) with EtOAc. The combined organic extracts were dried over solid Na,S04, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo leaving the carbamate product (99 mg, 88%) as an orange oil: 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCL) δ 7.31-7.14 (m, 5H), 6.98-6.93 (m, 2H), 6.83-6.76 (m, IH), 4.30-4.10 (m, 5H), 3.77-3.58 (m, 2H), 3.07-3.01 (m, IH), 2.61-2.54 (m, IH), 2.43 (s, 3H), 1.24 (t, J = 7.1 Hz, 3H); CI MS m/z = 325 [C20H2 N2O2+H] Step B: Lithium aluminum hydride (60 mg, 1.6 mmol) was added in portions to a solution of the product from Step A (99 mg, 0.30 mmol) in dry THF (5 mL). The reaction was heated at reflux for 6 h and then allowed to cool to room temperature. The reaction was quenched with EtOAc and then a saturated Na,S04 solution. The reaction was diluted with ether, dried over solid Na2S04, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue (81 mg) was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (8 g) eluting with 12% methanol/chloroform containing 1 % cone. NH OH to give compound the product (49 mg, 61 %) as a colorless oil: Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC1,) δ 7.32-7.17 (m, 5H), 7.04 (s, 1 H), 7.00 (d, J = 8.0 Hz. I H), 6.82 (d. J = 8.0 Hz, I H), 4.26 (t, J = 7.1 Hz, I H). 3.83-3.57 (m, 4H), 3.0.7-3.01 (m, IH), 2.54 (dd, J = 1 1.4, 8.9 Hz, IH), 2.45 (s, 3H). 2.43 (s, 3H): CI MS m/z = 267 [C]SH22N2+Hf.
Step C: A slurry of the product from Step B (20 mg, 0.075 mmol) and maleic acid (9 mg, 0.08 mmol) in absolute EtOH (5 mL) was heated in a 40 °C water bath until all of the solid had dissolved. After 2 h. the reaction was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was recrystallized from ethanol/ether producing the bis maleate product ( 13 mg, 35%) as a tan solid: mp 160- 163 °C (with decomposition); Η NMR (300 MHz, CDOD) δ 7.41-7.31 (m, 5H), 7.24-7.21 (m. 2H), 6.99 (d. J = 8.0 Hz, IH), 6.24 (s, 4H), 4.57 (dd, J = 10.9, 5.7 Hz, IH), 4.50 (s, 2H). 4.18 (s. 2H), 3.76 (dd, J = 12.3, 6.2 Hz, IH), 3.50-3.38 (m, IH), 3.00 (s, 3H), 2.72 (s, 3H); HPLC 95.8%, tr = 1 1.09 min. Example 92 Preparation of 8-hydroxy-2-methyl-4-phenyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydro-7-isoquinolinecarbonitrile
Step A: A solution of /V-methyl-2-methoxy amine (8.00 g, 52.9 mmol) and triethylamine (5.40 g, 53.0 mmol) in dichloromethane ( 100 mL) was cooled in an ice water bath. The 2-bromoacetophenone (10.5 g, 53.0 mmol) was added, and the reaction was allowed to warm to room temperature. The reaction mixture was diluted with water (200 mL) and MTBE (200 mL). Layers were separated, and the organic layer was washed with H20 and brine. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered, and concentrated to yield a red oil which was chromatographed (Si02, 20% EtOAc/hexanes) to yield the desired amino ketone as ayellow oil (12.6 g, 89%): Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC1,) δ 7.97 (d, J = 7.4 Hz, 2H), 7.53-7.50 (m, IH), 7.41 (t, =7.5 Hz, 2H), 7.32 (d, J = 7.4 Hz, IH), 7.28-7.21 (m, IH), 6.92 (t, J = 7.5 Hz, IH), 6.85 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, IH), 3.81 (s, 2H), 3.77 (s, 3H), 3.73 (s, 2H), 2.39 (s, 3H).
Step B: The product from Step A (12.6 g, 46.8 mmol) was taken up in methanol (120 mL) and cooled in an ice- water bath. Sodium borohydride (1.76 g, 46.8 mmol) was added portionwise. The reaction was stirred for 1 h at ambient temperature. The reaction mixture was concentrated to half of the original volume. Water (100 mL) was added, and the mixture was extracted (3 x) with dichloromethane. The combined organic layers were dried over MgS04, filtered, and concentrated to provide the desired amino alcohol as a light yellow oil (10.0 g, 79%): Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC1,) δ 7.39-7.21 (m, 6H), 6.94-6.85 (m, 3H), 4.78 (dd, 7=4.3, 9.6 Hz, IH), 3.85 (s, 3H), 3.82 (d, 7=12.8 Hz, IH), 3.47 (d, 7=12.8 Hz, IH), 2.62-2.57 (m. 2H), 2.28 (s, 3H). Step C: Methanesulfonic acid (47.7 mL, 735 mmol) was added at ambient temperature to a solution of the product from Step B (4.20 g, 13.7 mmol) in dichloromethane (250 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature under nitrogen for 24 h. After the reaction was complete, the reaction was made basic (pH - 1 1 ) with 2 N NaOH, and extracted (3 x) with methylene chloride. The combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over MgS0 and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by chromatography (SiO,, EtOAc/hexanes, 2/3) to give the desired product as a yellow oil (5.67 g, 61 %): Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC1,) δ 7.30-7.15 (m, 5H), 7.02 (t, 7=8.0 Hz, IH), 6.65 (d, 7=8.1 Hz, IH), 6.47 (d, 7 = 7.6 Hz, IH), 4.25 (t, 7=6.8 Hz, IH), 3.82 (s, 3H), 3.81 (d, 7=16.2 Hz, IH), 3.36 (d, 7=16.2 Hz, IH). 2.96 (dd, 7 = 4.1, 15.3 Hz, IH), 2.58 (dd, 7=8.5, 1 1.4 Hz, IH). 2.43 (s, 3H). Step D: A solution of the product from Step C (5.60 g, 22.1 mmol) in 48% hydrobromic acid (60 mL) was refluxed at 100 °C for 3 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and recrystallized from ethanol to yield the desired product (4.74 g, 67): Η NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-cQ δ 9.92 (s, IH), 7.48-7.25 (m, 3H), 7.21 (d. 7=7.8 Hz, IH), 6.98 (t, 7=7.7 Hz. IH), 6.67 (d. 7=7.8 Hz, IH), 6.24 (d. 7=7.7 Hz, IH). 4.26 (t, 7 = 6.0 Hz, IH), 3.80 (d, 7 = 15.8 Hz, IH), 3.32 (d, 7 = 15.8 Hz, IH), 2.99 (dd, 7 = 5.2, 1 1.3 Hz, IH). 2.66 (dd, 7 = 7.1 , 1 1.4 Hz, I H), 2.39 (s, 3H). Step E: A mixture of the product from step D (4.70 g, 14.7 mmol) and hexamethylenetetramine
(2.06 g, 14.7 mmol) in trifluoroacetic acid (50 mL) was heated to 80 °C for 7 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo then diluted with water (100 mL). The solution was made basic with solid Na„CO,. The resulting solution was extracted with ethyl ether (3 x), and the combined organic layers were concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by chromatography (SiO,, EtOAc/hexanes, 4/1 ) to afford the desired product as an off-white solid (2.47 mg. 49%): Η NMR (500 MHz, CDC0) δ 11.42 (bs, IH), 9.82 (s, IH), 7.28 (d, 7=8.1 Hz, IH), 7.12-6.90 (m, 3H), 6.54 (d, 7=8.1 Hz, IH), 4.19 (t, 7=6.1 Hz, IH), 3.72 (d, 7=16.1 Hz, IH), 3.62 (d, 7=16.2 Hz, IH), 2.93 (dd, 7= 11.9, 6.28 Hz, lH), 2.60 (dd, 7=11.4, 7.0 Hz, IH), 2.47 (s, 3H).
Step F: The product from Step E (1.00 g, 2.87 mmol) was dissolved in water (20 mL) before treatment with sodium sulfate (100 mg) and hydroxyl amine sulfonate (0.32 mg 2.87 mmol). Reaction was stirred for 2 h. Reaction was cooled in an ice- water bath and treated with CH2C12 (20 mL). Sodium bicarbonate (600 mg) was added and the reaction was allowed to warm to ambient temperature. The solids were filtered off and combined with the organic layer. The mixture was concentrated and chromatographed (SiO„ EtOAc/hexanes, 1/1). Two compounds eluted simultaneously. The mixture was treated with ethanol (5 mL) and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated to yield the desired nitrile as an off-white powder (130 mg, 17%): mp 234-238 °C (decomposed); Η NMR (300 MHz, CD.OD) δ 7.31 - 7.14 (m, 6H), 6.40 (d, 7=8.1 Hz, IH), 4.21 (t, 7=6.1 Hz, IH), 4.12 (bs, IH), 3.61-3.50 (m, 2H), 2.72 (dd, 7=5.4, 1 1.7 Hz, IH), 2.58 (dd, 7=7.1 , 1 1.5 Hz, IH), 2.38 (s, 3H). IR (KBr) 3427, 3026, 2940, 2207, 1590, 1454 cm"'; ESI MS m/z = 265 [Cl7Hl6N20+H]+; HPLC 96.3%, t = 13.54 min. Example 93
Preparation of (2-methyl-4-phenyl- 1 ,2.3.4-tetrahvdro-7-isoquinolinyl)methanol
Step A: A solution of Step C, Example 90 (127 mg, 0.51 1 mmol) in dry toluene (13 mL) was cooled to -16 °C and then 1 M DIBAL-H in toluene ( 1.7 mL, 1.7 mmol) was added dropwise. The reaction was stirred for 45 min with cooling and then EtOAc (1.1 L) was added. The reaction was allowed to warm to room temperature. The reaction was stirred for 45 min and then 1 N H2S04( 12 mL) was added. The reaction was heated at reflux for 30 min. After allowing the reaction to cool to room temperature, the reaction was diluted with water, made basic with 2 N NaOH, and extracted (2 x) with CH,C1,. The CH,CL extracts were dried over Na,S04, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give the desired product (1 12 mg, 87%) as a yellow oil: Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC1,) δ 9.95 (s, IH), 7.62 (s, I H), 7.59-7.56 (m, IH), 7.34-7.16 (m, 5H), 7.05 (d, 7 = 8.0 Hz, IH), 4.32 (t, 7 = 7.1 Hz, I H), 3.84 (d, 7 = 15.1 Hz, IH), 3.67 (d, 7 = 15.1 Hz, IH), 3.10-3.04 ( , IH), 2.60 (dd, 7 = 1 1.6, 8.6 Hz, IH), 2.46 (s, 3H).
Step B : To an ice-cold solution of the product from Step A (1 10 mg. 0.438 mmol) in methanol (20 mL) was added NaBH4 (36 mg, 0.95 mmol). The reaction was slowly allowed to warm to room temperature overnight. The reaction was quenched with water and brine and then was extracted (3 x) with CH,CL. The combined organic extracts were dried over Na,S04, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue (106 mg) was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (31 g) eluting with EtOAc to give the desired alcohol (44 mg, 40%) as a yellow oil: Η NMR (300 MHz. CDC1,) δ 7.32-7.22 (m. 3H). 7.17 (dd, 7 = 6.6. 1.6 Hz, 2H), 7.03 (d, 7 = 7.6 Hz, IH), 7.02 (s, IH), 6.83 (d, 7 = 7.6 Hz, IH). 4.61 (s. 2H), 4.26 (dd. 7 = 8.6. 6.0 Hz, IH), 3.69 (d, 7 = 14.9 Hz, I H), 3.55 (d, 7 = 14.9 Hz, IH), 3.07-3.01 (m. IH). 2.53 (dd. 7 = 1 1.5, 9.1 Hz, I H). 2.42 (s, 3H). Step C: A I M HCl solution in ether (1.0 mL, 1.0 mmol) was added dropwise to a stirred solution of theproduct from Step B (44 mg, 0.17 mmol) in MeOH (2 mL). The solvents and excess HCl were removed in vacuo, and the residue recrystallized from MeOH-Et,0 to give the salt (32 mg, 62%) as a green solid: mp 237-240 °C (with decomposition); Η NMR (300 MHz, CD.OD) δ 7.42-7.31 (m, 3H), 7.27-7.23 (m, 4H), 6.88 (d, 7 = 7.2 Hz, IH), 4.60 (bs, 5H) 3.84 (dd, 7 = 12.4 , 6.0 Hz, IH), 3.65-3.45 (m, IH), 3.08 (s, 3H); IR (KBr) 3356, 2934, 2596, 1495, 1456, 1428, 1049, 758, 703 cm"1; ESI MS m/z = 254 [C17H,(JNO+Hf; HPLC 94.9%, tr = 12.83 min; Anal. Calcd. for CI7H19NO-HC1-0.33 H20: C, 69.03; H, 7.04; N. 4.74. Found: C, 68.89; H, 6.87; N, 4.61. Example 94 Preparation of 2-ethyl-4-phenyl-1.2.3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline
Step A: Ethylene glycol dimethyl ether (20 mL) and 2 N Na2CO, (12.2 mL) were sparged with N2 and charged to a round bottom flask containing 4-bromoisoquinoline (2 g, 9.6 mmol), phenylboronic acid (1.76 g, 14.4 mmol), and Pd(PPh,)4 (1.1 1 g, 0.96 mmol). The entire solution was sparged with N2. The resulting reaction mixture was heated to reflux under N, overnight. The solution was cooled, quenched with saturated NaHCO, (230 mL), and extracted five times with ethyl ether. The combined organic was dried over Na,S04, filtered, and the solvent was removed in vacuo to yield an orange oil. Column chromatography (1 : 1 ethyl acetate/hexanes) afforded the pure isoquinoline as a yellow oil which crystallized upon refrigeration (2.21 g). Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC1,) δ 9.29 (s, IH), 8.52 (s, IH), 8.04 (d, IH, 7 = 8.4 Hz), 7.91 (d, IH, 7 = 8.1 Hz), 7.66 (m, 2H), 7.46 (m, 5H). Step B: Ethyl triflate (383 mg, 2.15 mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of the product from Step A (400 mg, 1.95 mmol) in CH,C1, (24 mL) at 0"C under N„. The solution was stirred for 15 min. at room temperature. The solvent was removed in vacuo to yield the triflate salt of the isoquinoline as a white solid (420 mg, 56% yield). The triflate salt (420 mg. 1.09 mmol) was dissolved in MeOH ( 16 mL), and NaCNBH, ( 159 mg, 2.53 mmol) was added to the solution. The resulting reaction mixture was stirred for 5 min., and a few drops of bromocresol green in MeOH were added. Methanolic HCl was added to the solution until a yellow color was observed. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 min, while adding methanolic HCl as needed to maintain a yellow color. The reaction mixture was quenched with H,0 (100 mL) and basified with 5% NaOH until a blue color was observed. The resulting solution was extracted four times with ethyl ether. The combined organic was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered, and solvent was removed in vacuo to yield the tetrahydroisoquinoline product as a clear oil (140 mg, 30% yield).
Step C: The maleate salt was prepared by adding aleic acid (68 mg, 0.59 mmol) and EtOH (2 mL) to the product from Step B . After refrigeration and removal of EtOH, a white solid was obtained (130 mg), mp=172-174"C. Free base: Η NMR CDCL, δ 7.17 (m. 8H), 6.85 (d, IH, 7 = 7.7 Hz). 4.28 (t, IH, 7 = 7 5 Hz), 3 89 (d, IH, 7 = 14.65 Hz), 3 62 (d, IH, 7 = 14 65 Hz), 3 15 (dd, IH, 7 = 5 7, 11 7 Hz), 2 57 (m, 2H), 1 16 (t, 3H, 7 = 7.2 Hz)
Binding Assays Pπmarv binding assays In order to evaluate the relative affinity of the various compounds at the NE, DA and 5HT transporters, HEK293E cell lines were developed to express each of the three human transporters cDNAs containing the complete coding regions of each transporter were amplified by PCR from human brain libraries The cDNAs contained in pCRII vectors were sequenced to verify their identity and then subcloned into an Epstem-Barr virus based expression plasmid (E Shen, GM Cooke, RA Horhck, Gene 156.235-239, 1995) This plasmid containing the coding sequence for one of the human transporters was transfected into HEK293E cells Successful transfection was verified by the ability of known reuptake blockers to inhibit the uptake of tπtiated NE, DA or 5HT
For binding, cells were homogenized, centrifuged and then resuspended in incubation buffer (50mM Tris, 120mM NaCl, 5mM KC1, pH 7 4) Then the appropriate radioligand was added For NET binding, [ H] Nisoxetine (86 0 Ci/mmol, NEN/DuPont) was added to a final concentration of approximately 5 nM For DAT binding, [Η] WIN 35,428 (84 5 Ci/mmol) at 15 nM was added For 5HTT binding, [Η] Citolapram (85 0 Ci/mmol) at 1 nM was added Then various concentrations (10Λ-5 to 10Λ-1 1 M) of the compound of interest were added to displace the radioligand Incubation was carried out at room temperature for 1 hour in a 96 well plate Following incubation, the plates were placed on a harvester and washed quickly 4 times with (50mM tris, 0 9% NaCl, pH 7 4) where the cell membranes containing the bound radioactive label were trapped on Whatman GF/B filters Scintillation cocktail was added to the filters which were then counted in a Packard TopCount Binding affinities of the compounds of interest were determined by non-linear curve regression using GraphPad Prism 2 01 software Non-specific binding was determined by displacement with 10 micromolar mazindol
TBZ assay
In order to assess in vivo activity of the compounds at the NE and DA transporters, their ability to prevent the sedative effects of tetrabenazine (TBZ) was determined (G Stille, Arzn Forsch 14 534- 537, 1964) Male CFI mice (Charles River Breeding Laboratories) weighing 18-25 gm at the time of testing, are housed a minimum of06 days under carefully controlled environmental conditions (22 2 + 1 1 C, 50% average humidity, 12 hr lighting cycle/24 hr) Mice are fasted overnight ( 16-22 hr) prior to testing Mice are placed into clear polycarbonated "shoe" boxes (17 cm x 28 5 cm x 12 cm) Randomized and coded doses of test compounds are administered p o A 45 mg/kg dose of tetrabenazine is administered I p 30 minutes prior to score time All compounds are administered in a volume of 0 1 ml/10 gm body weight Animals are evaluated for antagonism of tetrabenazine induced exploratory loss and ptosis at specified time intervals after drug administration. At the designated time interval, mice are examined for signs of exploratory activity and ptosis. Exploratory activity is evaluated by placing the animal in the center of a 5 inch circle. Fifteen seconds are allowed for the animal to move and intersect the perimeter. This is considered antagonism of tetrabenazine and given a score of 0. Failure to leave the circle is regarded as exploratory loss and given a score of 4. An animal is considered to have ptosis if its eyelids are at least 50% closed and given a score of 4 if completely closed. No closure is given a score of 0. Greater than 95% of the control (vehicle-treated) mice are expected to exhibit exploratory loss and ptosis. Drug activity is calculated as the percentage of mice failing to respond to the tetrabenazine challenge dose. Statistical evaluation.:
Median effective doses (ED,0s) and 95% confidence limits are determined numerically by the methods of Thompson (1947) and Litchfield and Wilcoxon (1949).

Claims

What is claimed is:
1. A compound of the formula IA-IF having the following structure:
Figure imgf000064_0001
IA-IF wherein: the carbon atom designated * is in the R or S configuration; R1 is C,-C6 alkyl. C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-Cf alkynyl, C.-C,, cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR" and -NR R"';
R2 is H, C.-C,, alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C.-C,, alkynyl, C Ch cycloalkyl, C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl or C,-C haloalkyl; R1 is H, halogen, -OR0 -S(O) R0 -S(O) NR"R12, -CN, -C(O)R0 -C(O)NR"R0 C,-C6 alkyl, C2-CΛ alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl, C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, -O(phenyl) or -O(benzyl), wherein each of -O(phenyl) and -O(benzyl) is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy, or wherein R is a C,-C6 alkyl, C,-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C,-Cfi cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl group, then said group is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C^C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR9 and -NR9R"'; provided that for compounds of formula IA, R1 is CrCft alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C C cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C. alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR9 and - NRV; provided that for compounds of formula IB, R' is -O(phenyl), -O(benzyl), -OC(0)Rn or -S(0)nR12, each of -O(phenyl) and -O(benzyl) is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy; R4 is H, halogen, -OR", -S(O) R'2, -S(0)NR"R12, -CN, -C(0)R12, -C(0)NR"R'2, - NR"R'2, C,-C6 alkyl,
C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl, C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, -O(phenyl) or -O(benzyl), wherein each of -O(phenyl) and -O(benzyl) is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy and wherein R4 is a CrC6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C,-Cή alkynyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl group, then said group is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR9 and -NR9R'"; provided that for compounds of formula IC, R4 is C,-C6 alkyl, C,-Cή alkenyl, C,-C6 alkynyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl, or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; provided that for compounds of formula ID, R4 is -O(phenyl), -O(benzyl), -OC(O)R0 -NR"R12 or - S(0)nR12, each of -O(phenyl) and -O(benzyl) being optionally substituted;
R\ R6 and R7 in compounds of each of the formulae IA, IB, IC, ID, IE and IF are each independently H, halogen, -OR", -S(O) R12, -CN, -C(O)R0 -NR"R12, -C(O)NR"R0 -NR"C(0)R'2, -NR"C(O)2R0 -
NR"C(O)NR12R0 C,-C6 alkyl. C2-Cή alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, wherein each of R\ R" and R7 is a C,-C6 alkyl, C2-C, alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl group, then said group is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR" and -NR9R"', or Rs and R" or R" and R7 may be -0-C(R12) -0-; provided that for compounds of formula IE at least one of Rs or R is fluoro, chloro, or methyl; or R" and R6 are each independently -0-C(Rι:),-0- in compounds of the formulae IE, but only where R7 is fluoro, chloro or methyl; or R7 and R6 can independently also be -0-C(Rl2),-0- in compounds of the formulae IE, but only where
R^ is fluoro, chloro or methyl;
R8 is H, halogen, or OR", provided that for compounds of formula IF, R* is halogen;
R9 and R'" are each independently H, C,-C alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, C,-C alkoxyalkyl, C,-C(. cycloalkyl, C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, -C(O)R0 phenyl or benzyl, where phenyl or benzyl is optionally substituted from
1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano,
C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy; or R" and R1" are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form piperidine, pyrrolidine, piperazine, N-methylpiperazine, morpholine, or thiomoφholine; R" is H, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, C,-C4 alkoxyalkyl, C,-Cβ cycloalkyl, C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, -
C(0)Rπ, phenyl or benzyl, where R" is a C C4 alkyl, phenyl or benzyl group, then said group is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy; R12 is H, amino, C,-C4 alkyl, (C,-C4 alkyl)amino, C,-C4 haloalkyl, C,-C4 alkoxyalkyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl, C4-
C7 cycloalkylalkyl, phenyl or benzyl, where phenyl or benzyl is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl and C,-C4 alkoxy; or R" and R12 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form piperidine, pyrrolidine, piperazine, N-methylpiperazine, moφholine, or thiomoφholine; provided that only one of R9 and R'" or R9 and Rιn are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form piperidine, pyrrolidine, piperazine, N-methylpiperazine, moφholine, or thiomoφholine;
R11 is C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl or phenyl; n is 0, 1, or 2, and; aryl is phenyl which is optionally substituted 1-3 times with halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl and C,-C4 alkoxy, or an oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, a solvate thereof, or prodrug thereof.
2. The compound of claim 1 , wherein R1 is C,-C, alkyl.
3. The compound of claim 2, wherein R' is CHV
4. The compound of claim 1 , wherein R2 is H, C,-C4 alkyl or C,-C haloalkyl.
5. The compound of claim 4, wherein R2 is H or CHr
6. The compound of claim 1, wherein R' is H or R1 is C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR9 and - NR R'", or R' is -O(phenyl) or -O(benzyl) optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy.
7. The compound of claim 6, wherein R is methyl, ethyl, propyl, or isopropyl.
8. The compound of claim 6, wherein R1 is -O(phenyl) or -0-CH2-(phenyl), each of which is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy.
9. The compound of claim 6, wherein R1 is H.
10. The compound of claim 1, wherein R4 is H, or R4 is -NR"R'2 or R4 is C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted, or wherein R4 is - O(phenyl) or -O(benzyl), each of which is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl,
C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy.
1 1. The compound of claim 10, wherein R4 is methyl, ethyl, propyl, or isopropyl.
12. The compound of claim 10, wherein R4 is -O(phenyl) or -0(CH2)phenyl, each of which is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy.
13. The compound of claim 10, wherein R4 is H.
14. The compound of claim 1 , wherein R1 and R4 are each H or wherein R1 and R4 are each halogen.
15. The compound of claim 1 , wherein one of R1 and R4 is H and the other is CHV
16. The compound of claim 1 , wherein R R6 and R7 are each H, halogen, -OR", -NR"R0 C,-C alkyl and substituted C,-C6 alkyl.
17. The compound of claim 16, wherein R , R6 and R7 are each H.
18. The compound of claim 16, wherein one of R' or R7 is F, Cl or Me and the other of Rs or R7 and R" are H, halogen, -OR", -NRnR'2, or optionally substituted C,-C6 alkyl.
19. The compound of claim 18, wherein Rs is F, Cl or Me; and R7 is H.
20. The compound of claim 18, wherein R' is F, Cl or Me; and R6 is H.
21. The compound of claim 1 , wherein R8 is halogen.
22. The compound of claim 21 , wherein R8 is fluoro.
23. The compound of claim 1, wherein: R' is C,-C, alkyl; R2 is H, C,-C4 alkyl or C,-C„ haloalkyl;
R1 is C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C6 cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted, or R' is -O(phenyl) or -O(benzyl), each of which is optionally substituted, or R' is H;
R4 is H, C,-C4 alkyl, 0,-C,, cycloalkyl or C4-C7 cycloalkylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected independently at each occurrence thereof from C,-C, alkyl, halogen, aryl, -CN, -OR9 and -NR9R"', or R4 is -NR"R'2, -O(phenyl) or -O(benzyl), wherein said -O(phenyl) or -O(benzyl), is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl,
C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy; or R' and R4 are each halogen; R\ R" and R7 are each H, halogen, -OR", -NR"R0 optionally substituted C,-C6 alkyl, or one of
R' and R7 is Cl, F or Me and the other of R' and R7 and R" is H, halogen, -OR", -NR"R12, C,-C6 alkyl or substituted C,-^ alkyl.
24. The compound of claim 23, wherein: R1 is CH,;
R2 is H or CH,;
R1 is H, F, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, -O(phenyl) or -0-CH2-(phenyl), wherein said - O(phenyl) or -0-CH,-(phenyl) is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy;
R4 is H, F methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, -O(phenyl) or -0-CH2-(phenyl), wherein said - O(phenyl) or -0-CH,-(phenyl) is optionally substituted from 1 to 3 times with a substituent selected independently at each occurrence thereof from halogen, cyano, C,-C4 alkyl, C,-C4 haloalkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy; R5, R6 and R7 are each H or R5 is F, Cl or Me, or one of R" or R7 is H and the other of R6 and R7 is halogen, -OR", -NRπR12, or optionally substituted C,-C6 alkyl.
25. The compound of claim 23, wherein RR is halogen.
26. A compound according to claim 1, wherein the carbon atom designated * is in the R configuration.
27. A compound according to claim 1, wherein the carbon atom designated * is in the S configuration.
29. A composition comprising a mixture of stereoisomeric compounds of claim 1 wherein the carbon atom designated * is in the S or R configuration.
29. A radiolabelled compound of claim 1.
30. A compound according to claim 1 , selected from the group: 2,7-dimethyl-4-phenyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; 4-(4-methoxy)phenyl-2,7-dimethyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; 2,7-dimethyl-4-(4-fluoro)phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
2,7-dimethyl-4-(3-fluoro)phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(3,4-difluoro)phenyl-2,7-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
2,7-dimethyl-4-(4-fluoro-3-methyl)phenyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(3-chloro-4-fluoro)phenyl-2,7-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; 4-(3-chloro)phenyl-2,7-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
2,7-dimethyl-4-(4-methyl)phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
2,7-dimethyl-4-(3-fluoro-4-methyl)phenyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(4-chloro)phenyl-2,7-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(4-chloro-3-fluoro)phenyl-2,7-dimethyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; 4-(3,4-dichloro)phenyl-2,7-dimethyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
7-ethyl-2-methyl-4-phenyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(3,4-difluoro)phenyl-7-ethyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
7-fluoro-4-(4-methoxy)phenyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
7-fluoro-4-(3-fluoro-4-methoxy)phenyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; 7-fluoro-4-(3-fluoro-4-methyl)phenyl-2-methyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -fluoro-4-(4-chloro-3-fluoro)phenyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,4-difluoro)phenyl-7-fluoro-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-chloro)phenyl-7-fluoro-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -cyano-2-methyl-4-phenyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -methyl-4-phenyl-7-trifluoromethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -phenyl- 1 ,2,7-trimethyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(4-chloro)phenyl-l,2-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,4-difluoro)phenyl-l,2-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -phenyl-2,7,8-trifluoromethyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,7-dimethyl-8-fluoro-4-phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,8-dimethyl-7-fluoro-4-phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,7-dimethyl-8-methoxy-4-phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,7-dimethyl-8-hydroxy-4-phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -methyl-4-phenyl-7-trifluoromethoxy-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,4-difluoro)phenyl-7-methoxy-2-methy 1- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(4-fluoro-3-methyl)phenyl-7-methoxy-2-methyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-fluoro-4-methyl)phenyl-7-methoxy-2-methyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -methoxy-4-(3-methyl)phenyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -methyl-7-phenoxy-4-phenyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(4-methoxy)phenoxy-2-methy 1-4-phenyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -benzyloxy-2-methyl-4-phenyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -hydroxy-2-methyl-4-(3-methyl)phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-fluoro-4-methyl)phenyl-7-hydroxy-2-methyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(4-fluoro-3-methyl)phenyl-7-hydroxy-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,4-difluoro)phenyl-7-hydroxy-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-cyano)phenyl-2-methyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,8-dimethyl-4-phenyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,8-dimethyl-4-(4-fluoro)phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,4-difluoro)phenyl-2,8-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,5-difluoro)phenyl-2,8-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,8-dimethyl-4-(3-fluoro)phenyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,8-dimethyl-4-(4-fluoro-3-methyl)phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-chloro-4-fluoro)phenyl-2,8-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,4-dichloro)phenyl-2,8-dimethyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-chloro)phenyl-2,8-dimethyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(4-chloro)phenyl-2,8-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(4-chloro-3-fluoro)phenyl-2,8-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,8-dimethyl-4-(4-methoxy)phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(4-cyano)phenyl-2,8-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,8-dimethyl-4-(4-trifluoromethyl)phenyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; ,8-dimethyl-4-(4-methyl)phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -methyl-8-(N-methylamino)methyl-4-phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(hydroxy)methyl-2-methyl-4-phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -methyl-4-phenyl-8-sulfonamide-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -methyl-8-(N-methyl)sulfonamide-4-phenyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -methoxy-2-methyl-4-(4-methyl)phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,5-difluoro)phenyl-8-methoxy-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-chloro)phenyl-8-methoxy-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,4-dichloro)phenyl-8-methoxy-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(4-chloro-3-fluoro)phenyl-8-methoxy-2-methyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-chloro-4-fluoro)phenyl-8-methoxy-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,5-difluoro)phenyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-chloro-5-fluoro)phenyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3,5-difluoro)phenyl-2,7-dimethyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-chloro-5-fluoro)phenyl-2,7-dimethyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
2-methyl-4-(3,4,5-trifluoro)phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-fluoro)pheny 1-2-methyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; -(3-fluoro-4-methyl)phenyl-2-methyl-l ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(4-fluoro-3-methyl)phenyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; 4-(3,4-difluoro)phenyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(3-chloro)phenyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(4-chloro-3-fluoro)phenyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(3-chloro-4-fluoro)phenyl-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(3-cyano)phenyl-2-methyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; 4-(4-acetanilide)-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
4-(4-chloro)phenyl-4-fluoro-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
(3,5-difluoro)-4-phenyl- 1 ,2,7-trimethyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline;
(8-fluoro-2-methyl-4-phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydro-7-isoquinolinyl)-N-methylmethanamine;
(2-methyl-4-phenyl-7-isoquinolinyl)-N-methylmethanamine; N-methyl(2-methyl-4-phenyl-7-isoquinolinyl)-N-methylmethanamine; 8-hydroxy-2-methyl-4-phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydro-7-isoquinolinecarbonitrile; (2-methyl-4-phenyl- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydro-7-isoquinolinyl)methanol; and 2-ethyl-4-phenyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline; and an oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, a solvate thereof, or prodrug thereof.
31. A compound according to claim 1, selected from table C.
32. A compound according to claim 1, wherein the enantiomer is selected from table D.
34. A compound according to claim 30, which is the (+) stereoisomer.
34. A compound according to claim 30, which is the (-) stereoisomer.
35. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a therapeutically effective amount of the compound of claim 1.
36. A method of treating a disorder which is created by or is dependent upon decreased availability of serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine, which comprises administering to a patient in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound according to claim 1 , or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
37. A method according to claim 36, which further comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a serotonin 1 A receptor antagonist, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
38. A method according to claim 37 wherein the serotonin 1 A receptor antagonist is chosen from the group consisting of WAY 100135 and spiperone.
39. A method according to claim 36, which further comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a selective neurokinin-1 receptor antagonist, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
40. A method according to claim 36, which further comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a norepinephrine precursor, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
41. A method according to claim 40, wherein the norepinephrine precursor is selected from the group consisting of L-tyrosine and L-phenylalanine.
42. A method according to claim 36, wherein the disorder is selected from the group: attention deficit disorder, hyperactivity disorder, anxiety, depression, post-traumatic stress disorder, supranuclear palsy, eating disorders, obsessive compulsive disorder, analgesia, nicotine addiction, panic attacks, Parkinsonism and phobia, obesity, late luteal phase syndrome or narcolepsy, ***e addiction, amphetamine addiction, and psychiatric symptoms anger such as, rejection sensitivity, and lack of mental or physical energy.
43. A method of inhibiting synaptic norepinephrine uptake in a patient in need thereof comprising administering a therapeutically effective inhibitory amount of a compound according to claim 1.
44. A method of inhibiting synaptic serotonin uptake in a patient in need thereof comprising administering a therapeutically effective inhibitory amount of a compound according to claim 1.
45. A method of inhibiting synaptic dopamine uptake in a patient in need thereof comprising administering a therapeutically effective inhibitory amount of a compound according to claim 1.
46. The method of claim 36 wherein the (+)-stereoisomer of the compound is employed.
47. The method of claim 36 wherein the (-)-stereoisomer of the compound is employed.
48. A kit comprising a compound according to claim 1 and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of: a serotonin IA receptor antagonist compound, a selective neurokinin-1 receptor antagonist compound, and a norepinephrine precursor compound.
49. The method of claim 36 for treating attention deficit/hyperactivity disorder.
PCT/US2000/030328 1999-11-03 2000-11-03 4-phenyl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin WO2001032624A1 (en)

Priority Applications (7)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CA2389300A CA2389300C (en) 1999-11-03 2000-11-03 4-phenyl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin
MXPA02004329A MXPA02004329A (en) 1999-11-03 2000-11-03 4 phenyl substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin.
NZ519146A NZ519146A (en) 1999-11-03 2000-11-03 4-phenyl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin
EP00976884A EP1246805A1 (en) 1999-11-03 2000-11-03 4-phenyl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin
BR0015307-9A BR0015307A (en) 1999-11-03 2000-11-03 Compound, composition, pharmaceutical composition, methods to treat a disorder that is created by or is dependent on the decreased availability of serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine, and to inhibit the absorption of synaptic norepinephrine, synaptic serotonin and synaptic dopamine in a patient in need of these, and together
AU14596/01A AU784280B2 (en) 1999-11-03 2000-11-03 4-phenyl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin
JP2001534776A JP4907817B2 (en) 1999-11-03 2000-11-03 4-Phenyl substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and their use to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US16327099P 1999-11-03 1999-11-03
US60/163,270 1999-11-03

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2001032624A1 true WO2001032624A1 (en) 2001-05-10

Family

ID=22589231

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2000/030328 WO2001032624A1 (en) 1999-11-03 2000-11-03 4-phenyl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin

Country Status (11)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1246805A1 (en)
JP (1) JP4907817B2 (en)
KR (2) KR100878855B1 (en)
CN (1) CN100436420C (en)
AU (1) AU784280B2 (en)
BR (1) BR0015307A (en)
CA (1) CA2389300C (en)
MX (1) MXPA02004329A (en)
NZ (1) NZ519146A (en)
RU (1) RU2293728C2 (en)
WO (1) WO2001032624A1 (en)

Cited By (35)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2003040174A2 (en) * 2001-11-09 2003-05-15 Probiodrug Ag Substituted amino ketone compounds
WO2003048129A1 (en) * 2001-12-05 2003-06-12 Aventis Pharma Deutschland Gmbh Substituted 4-phenyltetrahydroisoquinolines, method for the production thereof, the use thereof as medicaments, in addition to a medicament containing same
US6703405B2 (en) 2001-12-22 2004-03-09 Aventis Pharma Deutschland Gmbh Substituted 4-phenyltetrahydroisoquinolinium salts, process for their preparation, their use as a medicament, and medicament containing them
WO2004050630A1 (en) * 2002-12-02 2004-06-17 Pharmacia & Upjohn Company Llc The use of aryl- and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines in the treatment of chronic and neuropathic pain, migraine headaches, and urge, stress and mixed urinary incontinence
WO2004050629A2 (en) * 2002-12-02 2004-06-17 Pharmacia & Upjohn Company Llc The use of 4-phenyl substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines in the treatment of pain, migraine and urinary incontinence
WO2004050628A1 (en) * 2002-12-02 2004-06-17 Pharmacia & Upjohn Company Llc The use of 4-phenyl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines in the treatment of pain, migraine headaches and urinary incontinence
WO2004085404A1 (en) * 2003-03-24 2004-10-07 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Substituted 4-phenyltetrahydroisoquinolines, method for the production thereof, the use of the same as medicaments, and medicament containing such compounds
US6844316B2 (en) 2001-09-06 2005-01-18 Probiodrug Ag Inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase I
US6911453B2 (en) 2001-12-05 2005-06-28 Aventis Pharma Deutschland Gmbh Substituted 4-phenyltetrahydroisoquinolinium, process for their preparation, their use as a medicament, and medicament containing them
US6949515B2 (en) 1999-08-24 2005-09-27 Probiodrug Ag Effectors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV for topical use
WO2006032372A1 (en) * 2004-09-23 2006-03-30 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Substituted 4-phenyltetrahydroisoquinolines, method for the production thereof, their use as a medicament, and a medicament containing them
WO2006066197A1 (en) * 2004-12-17 2006-06-22 Janssen Pharmaceutica, N.V. Tetrahydroisoquinoline compounds for treatment of cns disorders
US7109347B2 (en) 2001-06-27 2006-09-19 Probiodrug Ag Dipeptidyl peptidase IV inhibitors and their uses as anti-cancer agents
WO2006057950A3 (en) * 2004-11-22 2006-10-26 Amr Technology Inc 4-phenyl substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin
US7166579B2 (en) 1998-06-24 2007-01-23 Prosidion Limited Prodrugs of DP IV-inhibitors
WO2007029106A1 (en) * 2005-09-09 2007-03-15 Analytecon Sa Isoquinolines as igf-1r inhibitors
DE102005044815A1 (en) * 2005-09-20 2007-03-22 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Use of inhibitors of Na + / H + exchanger, subtype 5 (NHE5) for memory improvement
EP1778639A2 (en) * 2004-07-15 2007-05-02 AMR Technology, Inc. Aryl-and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
US7241775B2 (en) 2003-03-24 2007-07-10 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Composition, process of making, and medical use of substituted 4-phenyltetrahydroisoquinolines
EP1819337A2 (en) * 2004-11-22 2007-08-22 AMR Technology, Inc. Aryl-and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin
WO2007137953A1 (en) * 2006-05-31 2007-12-06 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Benzazepine derivatives as monoamine reuptake inhibitors
EP1904069A2 (en) * 2005-07-15 2008-04-02 AMR Technology, Inc. Aryl-and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydrobenzazepines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
US7368421B2 (en) 2001-06-27 2008-05-06 Probiodrug Ag Use of dipeptidyl peptidase IV inhibitors in the treatment of multiple sclerosis
US7381537B2 (en) 2003-05-05 2008-06-03 Probiodrug Ag Use of inhibitors of glutaminyl cyclases for treatment and prevention of disease
US7417054B2 (en) 2005-06-17 2008-08-26 Janssen Pharmaceutica N.V. Naphthyridine compounds
WO2008144305A1 (en) * 2007-05-18 2008-11-27 Janssen Pharmaceutica N.V. Diaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines as histamine h3 receptor and serotonin transporter modulators
US7462599B2 (en) 2003-10-15 2008-12-09 Probiodrug Ag Use of effectors of glutaminyl and glutamate cyclases
US7504393B2 (en) 2001-01-26 2009-03-17 Btg International Limited Benzylamine analogues
US7754882B2 (en) 2005-06-17 2010-07-13 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Hexahydro-pyrrolo-isoquinoline compounds
US7868003B2 (en) 2005-01-12 2011-01-11 Sanofi-Aventis Substituted 4-phenyltetrahydroisoquinolines, pharmaceutical compositions comprising them and therapeutic methods for their use
EP2420237A1 (en) * 2010-08-11 2012-02-22 Ville Takio Fluorinated derivatives of endogenous isoquinolines for use in the treatment of diseases mediated through endogenous isoquinoline pathways
US8802696B2 (en) 2009-05-12 2014-08-12 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. 7-([1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyridin-6-yl)-4-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoqu inoli and use thereof
US8815894B2 (en) 2009-05-12 2014-08-26 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Crystalline forms of (S)-7-([1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyridin-6-yl)-4-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline and use thereof
US9034899B2 (en) 2009-05-12 2015-05-19 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocycle substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof
US9156812B2 (en) 2008-06-04 2015-10-13 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Crystalline form of 6-[(4S)-2-methyl-4-(2-naphthyl)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolin-7-yl]pyridazin-3-amine

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
ATE387429T1 (en) * 1999-11-03 2008-03-15 Amr Technology Inc ARLY- AND HETEROARYL-SUBSTITUTED TETRAHYDROISOQUINOLINES AND THEIR USE AS NOREPINEPHRINE, DOPAMINE AND SEROTONIN REUPPOST INHIBITORS
FR2884251B1 (en) * 2005-04-08 2007-07-13 Servier Lab PIPERAZINE DERIVATIVES, PROCESS FOR THEIR PREPARATION AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING SAME
CN100386319C (en) * 2005-12-05 2008-05-07 中国人民解放军第二军医大学 Tetra hydro iso quinoline compounds possessing anti breed and anti fungus activity and its salt

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3666763A (en) * 1970-01-06 1972-05-30 Hoffmann La Roche 4-phenyl isoquinolines and process for preparing same
US3947456A (en) * 1970-01-06 1976-03-30 Hoffman-La Roche Inc. Substituted 4-phenyl isoquinolines
EP0400319A1 (en) * 1989-04-24 1990-12-05 N I S Pri Vchti 4-(4'-Halophenyl)-2-methyl-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolines and process for their preparation
US5654296A (en) * 1994-04-28 1997-08-05 Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd. Condensed heterocyclic compounds, their production and use

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CH538477A (en) * 1970-01-06 1973-06-30 Hoffmann La Roche Antidepressant 4-phenyl-tetrahydroquino- - lines
GB1504424A (en) * 1975-08-09 1978-03-22 Beecham Group Ltd Isoquinoline-derived aminoethers
US4340600A (en) * 1980-05-22 1982-07-20 Smithkline Corporation Renal dilating methods and compositions using 4-(3,4-dihydroxyphenyl)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolines
ATE387429T1 (en) * 1999-11-03 2008-03-15 Amr Technology Inc ARLY- AND HETEROARYL-SUBSTITUTED TETRAHYDROISOQUINOLINES AND THEIR USE AS NOREPINEPHRINE, DOPAMINE AND SEROTONIN REUPPOST INHIBITORS

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3666763A (en) * 1970-01-06 1972-05-30 Hoffmann La Roche 4-phenyl isoquinolines and process for preparing same
US3947456A (en) * 1970-01-06 1976-03-30 Hoffman-La Roche Inc. Substituted 4-phenyl isoquinolines
EP0400319A1 (en) * 1989-04-24 1990-12-05 N I S Pri Vchti 4-(4'-Halophenyl)-2-methyl-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolines and process for their preparation
US5654296A (en) * 1994-04-28 1997-08-05 Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd. Condensed heterocyclic compounds, their production and use

Non-Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
AIHARA K ET AL.: "Increasing 5-Lipoxygenase Inhibitory Activities by Oxidative Conversion of o-Methoxyphenols to Catechols Usinge a Cu2+ - Ascorbic Acid - O2 System", CHEMICAL AND PHARMACEUTICAL BULLETIN, vol. 38, no. 3, 1990, PHARMACEUTICAL SOCIETY OF JAPAN. TOKYO., JP, pages 842 - 844, XP000941928, ISSN: 0009-2363 *
DANDRIDGE P A ET AL: "SYNTHESIS, RESOLUTION, ABSOLUTE STEREOCHEMISTRY, AND ENANTIOSELECTIVITY OF 3',4'-DIHYDROXYNOMIFENSINE", JOURNAL OF MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY,US,AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY. WASHINGTON, vol. 27, no. 1, 1984, pages 28 - 35, XP000567038, ISSN: 0022-2623 *
GAO, TETRAHEDRON, vol. 50, 1994, pages 979 - 988
KIHARA M ET AL.: "Synthesis and enantioselectivity of optically active 1- and 3-substituted 4-phenyl-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolin-4-ols and related compounds as norepinephrine potentiators", CHEMICAL AND PHARMACEUTICAL BULLETIN., vol. 43, no. 9, 1995, PHARMACEUTICAL SOCIETY OF JAPAN. TOKYO., JP, pages 1543 - 1546, XP000941927, ISSN: 0009-2363 *
KIHARA M ET AL.: "Synthesis and pharmacological evaluation of phenolic 2-methyl-4-phenyl-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolin-4-ols as a new norepinephrine potentiator", DRUG DESIGN AND DISCOVERY, vol. 11, no. 3, 1994, HARWOOD ACADEMIC PUBLISHERS GMBH., XX, pages 175 - 183, XP000973683, ISSN: 1055-9612 *
MARYANOFF B E ET AL.: "Pyrroloisoquinoline antidepressants. 2. In-depth exploration of structure-activity relationships", JOURNAL OF MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY, vol. 30, no. 8, 1987, AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY. WASHINGTON., US, pages 1433 - 1454, XP000941930, ISSN: 0022-2623 *
MONDESHKA D M ET AL.: "Synthesis, antiulcer and antidepressant activity of 4-(4-halophenyl)-2-phenyl-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolines", FARMACO, vol. 49, no. 7-8, 1994, SOCIETA CHIMICA ITALIANA, PAVIA., IT, pages 475 - 480, XP000973748, ISSN: 0014-827X *
ZARA-KACZIAN E ET AL.: "8-Amino-4-aryl-2-methyl-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolines: Reactions of the Amino Group via the Diazonium Salts", ACTA CHIMICA HUNGARICA, vol. 126, no. 4, 1989, AKADEMIAI KIADO, BUDAPEST., HU, pages 573 - 584, XP000973660, ISSN: 0231-3146 *

Cited By (72)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7166579B2 (en) 1998-06-24 2007-01-23 Prosidion Limited Prodrugs of DP IV-inhibitors
US6949515B2 (en) 1999-08-24 2005-09-27 Probiodrug Ag Effectors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV for topical use
US7335645B2 (en) 1999-08-24 2008-02-26 Probiodrug Ag Effectors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV for topical use
US7514475B2 (en) 2001-01-26 2009-04-07 Btg International Limited Benzylamine analogues
US7504437B2 (en) 2001-01-26 2009-03-17 Btg International Limited Benzylamine analogues
US7504393B2 (en) 2001-01-26 2009-03-17 Btg International Limited Benzylamine analogues
US7368576B2 (en) 2001-06-27 2008-05-06 Probiodrug Ag Dipeptidyl peptidase IV inhibitors and their uses as anti-cancer agents
US7109347B2 (en) 2001-06-27 2006-09-19 Probiodrug Ag Dipeptidyl peptidase IV inhibitors and their uses as anti-cancer agents
US7368421B2 (en) 2001-06-27 2008-05-06 Probiodrug Ag Use of dipeptidyl peptidase IV inhibitors in the treatment of multiple sclerosis
US7144856B2 (en) 2001-09-06 2006-12-05 Probiodrug Ag Inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase I
US6844316B2 (en) 2001-09-06 2005-01-18 Probiodrug Ag Inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase I
WO2003040174A2 (en) * 2001-11-09 2003-05-15 Probiodrug Ag Substituted amino ketone compounds
WO2003040174A3 (en) * 2001-11-09 2003-12-24 Probiodrug Ag Substituted amino ketone compounds
NO326650B1 (en) * 2001-12-05 2009-01-26 Aventis Pharma Deutschland Gmbh Substituted 4-phenyltetrahydroisoquinolines, their use in the manufacture of medicaments, in addition to medicinal products containing the same
AU2002356689B2 (en) * 2001-12-05 2008-05-15 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Substituted 4-phenyltetrahydroisoquinolines, method for the production thereof, the use thereof as medicaments, in addition to a medicament containing same
JP2005515205A (en) * 2001-12-05 2005-05-26 アベンティス・ファーマ・ドイチユラント・ゲゼルシャフト・ミット・ベシュレンクテル・ハフツング Substituted 4-phenyltetrahydroisoquinolines, process for their production, their use as pharmaceuticals, and medicaments containing them
WO2003048129A1 (en) * 2001-12-05 2003-06-12 Aventis Pharma Deutschland Gmbh Substituted 4-phenyltetrahydroisoquinolines, method for the production thereof, the use thereof as medicaments, in addition to a medicament containing same
US6911453B2 (en) 2001-12-05 2005-06-28 Aventis Pharma Deutschland Gmbh Substituted 4-phenyltetrahydroisoquinolinium, process for their preparation, their use as a medicament, and medicament containing them
US6703405B2 (en) 2001-12-22 2004-03-09 Aventis Pharma Deutschland Gmbh Substituted 4-phenyltetrahydroisoquinolinium salts, process for their preparation, their use as a medicament, and medicament containing them
WO2004050629A3 (en) * 2002-12-02 2004-07-29 Upjohn Co The use of 4-phenyl substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines in the treatment of pain, migraine and urinary incontinence
WO2004050628A1 (en) * 2002-12-02 2004-06-17 Pharmacia & Upjohn Company Llc The use of 4-phenyl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines in the treatment of pain, migraine headaches and urinary incontinence
WO2004050629A2 (en) * 2002-12-02 2004-06-17 Pharmacia & Upjohn Company Llc The use of 4-phenyl substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines in the treatment of pain, migraine and urinary incontinence
WO2004050630A1 (en) * 2002-12-02 2004-06-17 Pharmacia & Upjohn Company Llc The use of aryl- and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines in the treatment of chronic and neuropathic pain, migraine headaches, and urge, stress and mixed urinary incontinence
WO2004085404A1 (en) * 2003-03-24 2004-10-07 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Substituted 4-phenyltetrahydroisoquinolines, method for the production thereof, the use of the same as medicaments, and medicament containing such compounds
US7241775B2 (en) 2003-03-24 2007-07-10 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Composition, process of making, and medical use of substituted 4-phenyltetrahydroisoquinolines
JP2006521306A (en) * 2003-03-24 2006-09-21 サノフィ−アベンティス・ドイチュラント・ゲゼルシャフト・ミット・ベシュレンクテル・ハフツング Substituted 4-phenyltetrahydroisoquinolines, processes for their preparation, their use as medicaments and medicaments containing such compounds
CN100364978C (en) * 2003-03-24 2008-01-30 塞诺菲-安万特德国有限公司 Composition, process of making, and medical use of substituted 4-phenyltetrahydroisoquinolines
US7381537B2 (en) 2003-05-05 2008-06-03 Probiodrug Ag Use of inhibitors of glutaminyl cyclases for treatment and prevention of disease
US7462599B2 (en) 2003-10-15 2008-12-09 Probiodrug Ag Use of effectors of glutaminyl and glutamate cyclases
US8227486B2 (en) 2004-07-15 2012-07-24 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Aryl- and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
EP1778639A4 (en) * 2004-07-15 2010-07-21 Amr Technology Inc Aryl-and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
US9499531B2 (en) 2004-07-15 2016-11-22 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Aryl- and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
US9085531B2 (en) 2004-07-15 2015-07-21 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Aryl- and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
KR101412339B1 (en) 2004-07-15 2014-06-25 알바니 몰레큘라 리써치, 인크. Aryl- and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
EP1778639A2 (en) * 2004-07-15 2007-05-02 AMR Technology, Inc. Aryl-and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
US8741901B2 (en) 2004-07-15 2014-06-03 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Aryl- and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
KR101389246B1 (en) 2004-07-15 2014-04-24 브리스톨-마이어스스퀴브컴파니 Aryl- and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
US8236796B2 (en) 2004-07-15 2012-08-07 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Aryl- and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
AU2005274927B2 (en) * 2004-07-15 2011-11-03 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Aryl-and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
WO2006032372A1 (en) * 2004-09-23 2006-03-30 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Substituted 4-phenyltetrahydroisoquinolines, method for the production thereof, their use as a medicament, and a medicament containing them
US7790742B2 (en) 2004-09-23 2010-09-07 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Substituted 4-phenyltetrahydroisoquinolines, pharmaceutical compositions thereof, methods for their preparation and therapeutic use
WO2006057950A3 (en) * 2004-11-22 2006-10-26 Amr Technology Inc 4-phenyl substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin
EP1819337A2 (en) * 2004-11-22 2007-08-22 AMR Technology, Inc. Aryl-and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin
EP1819337A4 (en) * 2004-11-22 2009-11-04 Amr Technology Inc Aryl-and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin
WO2006066197A1 (en) * 2004-12-17 2006-06-22 Janssen Pharmaceutica, N.V. Tetrahydroisoquinoline compounds for treatment of cns disorders
US7868003B2 (en) 2005-01-12 2011-01-11 Sanofi-Aventis Substituted 4-phenyltetrahydroisoquinolines, pharmaceutical compositions comprising them and therapeutic methods for their use
US8273762B2 (en) 2005-06-17 2012-09-25 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Hexahydro-pyrrolo-isoquinoline compounds
US7754882B2 (en) 2005-06-17 2010-07-13 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Hexahydro-pyrrolo-isoquinoline compounds
US7417054B2 (en) 2005-06-17 2008-08-26 Janssen Pharmaceutica N.V. Naphthyridine compounds
EP1904069A4 (en) * 2005-07-15 2010-08-18 Amr Technology Inc Aryl-and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydrobenzazepines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
EP1904069A2 (en) * 2005-07-15 2008-04-02 AMR Technology, Inc. Aryl-and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydrobenzazepines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
US7956050B2 (en) 2005-07-15 2011-06-07 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Aryl- and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydrobenzazepines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
US8791101B2 (en) 2005-07-15 2014-07-29 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Aryl- and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydrobenzazepines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
US9403776B2 (en) 2005-07-15 2016-08-02 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Aryl- and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydrobenzazepines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
AU2006288846B2 (en) * 2005-09-09 2011-08-18 Analytecon Sa Isoquinolines as IGF-1R inhibitors
US8044067B2 (en) 2005-09-09 2011-10-25 Analytecon S.A. Isoquinolines as IGF-1R inhibitors
WO2007029106A1 (en) * 2005-09-09 2007-03-15 Analytecon Sa Isoquinolines as igf-1r inhibitors
WO2007033774A2 (en) * 2005-09-20 2007-03-29 Sanofi-Aventis Use of inhibitors of the na+/h+ exchanger, subtype 5 (nhe5), to improve memory retention
DE102005044815A1 (en) * 2005-09-20 2007-03-22 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Use of inhibitors of Na + / H + exchanger, subtype 5 (NHE5) for memory improvement
WO2007033774A3 (en) * 2005-09-20 2007-06-28 Sanofi Aventis Deutschland Use of inhibitors of the na+/h+ exchanger, subtype 5 (nhe5), to improve memory retention
WO2007137953A1 (en) * 2006-05-31 2007-12-06 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Benzazepine derivatives as monoamine reuptake inhibitors
US7622462B2 (en) 2006-05-31 2009-11-24 Roche Palo Alto Llc Benzazepine derivatives and uses thereof
WO2008144305A1 (en) * 2007-05-18 2008-11-27 Janssen Pharmaceutica N.V. Diaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines as histamine h3 receptor and serotonin transporter modulators
US7846930B2 (en) 2007-05-18 2010-12-07 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Diaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines as histamine H3 receptor and serotonin transporter modulators
US9156812B2 (en) 2008-06-04 2015-10-13 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Crystalline form of 6-[(4S)-2-methyl-4-(2-naphthyl)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolin-7-yl]pyridazin-3-amine
US9498476B2 (en) 2008-06-04 2016-11-22 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Crystalline form of 6-[(4S)-2-methyl-4-(2-naphthyl)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolin-7-yl]pyridazin-3-amine
US9173879B2 (en) 2009-05-12 2015-11-03 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Crystalline forms of (S)-7-([1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a ]pyridin-6-yl)-4-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline and use thereof
US9034899B2 (en) 2009-05-12 2015-05-19 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocycle substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof
US8815894B2 (en) 2009-05-12 2014-08-26 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Crystalline forms of (S)-7-([1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyridin-6-yl)-4-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline and use thereof
US8802696B2 (en) 2009-05-12 2014-08-12 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. 7-([1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyridin-6-yl)-4-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoqu inoli and use thereof
US9604960B2 (en) 2009-05-12 2017-03-28 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocycle substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof
EP2420237A1 (en) * 2010-08-11 2012-02-22 Ville Takio Fluorinated derivatives of endogenous isoquinolines for use in the treatment of diseases mediated through endogenous isoquinoline pathways

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AU1459601A (en) 2001-05-14
CN1413197A (en) 2003-04-23
KR20020081211A (en) 2002-10-26
EP1246805A1 (en) 2002-10-09
NZ519146A (en) 2004-02-27
CN100436420C (en) 2008-11-26
JP2004501860A (en) 2004-01-22
KR100878855B1 (en) 2009-01-15
RU2293728C2 (en) 2007-02-20
AU784280B2 (en) 2006-03-02
BR0015307A (en) 2002-07-09
CA2389300C (en) 2010-06-08
KR20080065707A (en) 2008-07-14
JP4907817B2 (en) 2012-04-04
CA2389300A1 (en) 2001-05-10
MXPA02004329A (en) 2005-08-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CA2389300C (en) 4-phenyl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin
US20060111396A1 (en) 4-Phenyl substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin
US7612090B2 (en) Aryl and heteroaryl substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof
AU2005274927B2 (en) Aryl-and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
US20060111395A1 (en) Aryl-and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine and serotonin
EP2429295B1 (en) Aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocycle substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof
US7163949B1 (en) 4-phenyl substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AU BR CA CN CZ EE HU IL IN JP KR LT LV MX NO NZ PL RO SG SI SK TR UA VN ZA

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE TR

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2389300

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: PA/a/2002/004329

Country of ref document: MX

Ref document number: IN/PCT/2002/630/CHE

Country of ref document: IN

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1020027005740

Country of ref document: KR

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2001 534776

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 519146

Country of ref document: NZ

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 14596/01

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2000976884

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2002 2002114337

Country of ref document: RU

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 008177899

Country of ref document: CN

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2000976884

Country of ref document: EP

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1020027005740

Country of ref document: KR

WWG Wipo information: grant in national office

Ref document number: 519146

Country of ref document: NZ

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 519146

Country of ref document: NZ